]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
daily update
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
7ca01ed9
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011,
5@c 2012, 2013
8a308ae8 6@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 7@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 8@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
9@include configdoc.texi
10@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 11@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 12@c man end
252b5132
RH
13
14@c @smallbook
15
ff5dcc92
SC
16@macro gcctabopt{body}
17@code{\body\}
18@end macro
19
0285c67d
NC
20@c man begin NAME
21@ifset man
22@c Configure for the generation of man pages
23@set UsesEnvVars
24@set GENERIC
0285c67d 25@set ARM
ac145307 26@set C6X
49fa1e15 27@set H8300
0285c67d 28@set HPPA
0285c67d 29@set I960
0285c67d 30@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 31@set M68K
3c3bdf30 32@set MMIX
2469cfa2 33@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
9fbcbd81 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
7ca01ed9
NC
592001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2012, 2013
60Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 61
cf055d54 62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 68@end copying
252b5132
RH
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 72@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 73@titlepage
71ba23f6 74@title The GNU linker
252b5132 75@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
252b5132
RH
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81 97Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
7ca01ed9
NC
981999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009,
992012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 100
0285c67d 101Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 102under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
103or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
104with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
105Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 106section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 107@c man end
252b5132 108
252b5132
RH
109@end titlepage
110@end iftex
4ecceb71 111@contents
252b5132
RH
112@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
113
84ec0e6d 114@ifnottex
252b5132 115@node Top
71ba23f6 116@top LD
e49e529d
JM
117This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
118@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
119@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
120@end ifset
121version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 122
cf055d54 123This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
124Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
125in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 126
252b5132
RH
127@menu
128* Overview:: Overview
129* Invocation:: Invocation
130* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
131@ifset GENERIC
132* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
133@end ifset
134@ifclear GENERIC
135@ifset H8300
136* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
137@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
138@ifset Renesas
139* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
140@end ifset
141@ifset I960
142* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
143@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
144@ifset ARM
145* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
150@ifset HPPA
151* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
152@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
153@ifset M68K
154* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
155@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
156@ifset POWERPC
157* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset POWERPC64
160* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
251* Options:: Command Line Options
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
256@section Command Line Options
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca
NC
335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
355
356Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifset I960
382@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
383@kindex -A @var{arch}
384@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
385@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
386@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
387In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
388Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
389@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
390the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 391archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
392family}, for details.
393
ff5dcc92 394Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
395other architecture families.
396@end ifset
397
398@ifclear SingleFormat
399@cindex binary input format
400@kindex -b @var{format}
401@kindex --format=@var{format}
402@cindex input format
403@cindex input format
404@item -b @var{input-format}
405@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
406@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
407file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 408@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 409that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 410configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 411to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
412default input format the most usual format on each machine.
413@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
414supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
415formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
416@xref{BFD}.
417
418You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
419binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
420linking object files of different formats), by including
421@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 422particular format.
252b5132
RH
423
424The default format is taken from the environment variable
425@code{GNUTARGET}.
426@ifset UsesEnvVars
427@xref{Environment}.
428@end ifset
429You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
430@code{TARGET};
431@ifclear man
432see @ref{Format Commands}.
433@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
434@end ifclear
435
436@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
438@cindex compatibility, MRI
439@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
440@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 441For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 442files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
443@ifclear man
444@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
445@end ifclear
446@ifset man
447the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
448@end ifset
449Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 450the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
451scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
452If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
453specified by any @samp{-L} options.
454
455@cindex common allocation
456@kindex -d
457@kindex -dc
458@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 459@item -d
252b5132
RH
460@itemx -dc
461@itemx -dp
462These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
463compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
464even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
465script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
466@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
467
7ee314fa
AM
468@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
471@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
472Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
473@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
474specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
475will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
476option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 477The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 478
252b5132
RH
479@cindex entry point, from command line
480@kindex -e @var{entry}
481@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 482@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
483@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
484Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
485program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
486named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
487and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
488base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
489@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
490and other ways of specifying the entry point.
491
b58f81ae
DJ
492@kindex --exclude-libs
493@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
494Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 495exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
496@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
497automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
498port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
499explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
500option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
501be treated as hidden.
502
e1c37eb5
DK
503@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
504@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
505Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
506should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
507into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
508may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
509used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
510the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
511match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
512command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
513of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
514regardless of this option.
515
252b5132
RH
516@cindex dynamic symbol table
517@kindex -E
518@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 519@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
520@item -E
521@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
522@itemx --no-export-dynamic
523When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
524option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
525all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
526set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
527
528If you do not use either of these options (or use the
529@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
530dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
531referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
532
533If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
534back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
535dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
536linking the program itself.
537
55255dae 538You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 539be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 540See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 541
8b747e1a
DK
542Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
543support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
544the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
545
36f63dca 546@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
547@cindex big-endian objects
548@cindex endianness
549@kindex -EB
550@item -EB
551Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
552
553@cindex little-endian objects
554@kindex -EL
555@item -EL
556Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 557@end ifclear
252b5132 558
2509a395
SL
559@kindex -f @var{name}
560@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
561@item -f @var{name}
562@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
563When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
564to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
565table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
566symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
567
568If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
569run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
570the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
571first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
572@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
573in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
574Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
575implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
576machine specific performance.
577
578This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
579will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
580
2509a395
SL
581@kindex -F @var{name}
582@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 583@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 584@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
585When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
586the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
587of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
588on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
589
590If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
591run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
592dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
593filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
594found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
595used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
596@var{name}.
597
ff5dcc92 598Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 599toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
600object files.
601@ifclear SingleFormat
602The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 603@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 604@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
605environment variable.
606@end ifclear
607The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
608creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 609
3dbf70a2 610@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
611@kindex -fini=@var{name}
612@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
613When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
614executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
615address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
616the function to call.
617
252b5132
RH
618@kindex -g
619@item -g
620Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
621
2509a395
SL
622@kindex -G @var{value}
623@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 624@cindex object size
2509a395 625@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
626@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
627Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
628@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
629MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
630sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
631
632@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 633@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 634@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 635@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
636@itemx -soname=@var{name}
637When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
638the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
639which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
640linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
641field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
642
643@kindex -i
644@cindex incremental link
645@item -i
646Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
647
3dbf70a2 648@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
649@kindex -init=@var{name}
650@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
651When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
652executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
653of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
654function to call.
655
252b5132 656@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 657@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 658@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 659@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
660@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
661Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
662list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
663If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 664will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 665will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 666
ff5dcc92 667On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
668files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
669and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
670called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
671@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
672indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
673to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
674@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
675
676The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
677specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
678was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
679command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
680archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
681the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
682
ff5dcc92 683See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
684archives multiple times.
685
686You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
687
688@ifset GENERIC
689This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 690if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
691behaviour of the AIX linker.
692@end ifset
693
694@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 695@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 696@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 697@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 698@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
699Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
700for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
701option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
702in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
703on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 704@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
705order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
706how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
707option is specified.
252b5132 708
9c8ebd6a
DJ
709If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
710by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
a712da20
NC
831@kindex -q
832@kindex --emit-relocs
833@cindex retain relocations in final executable
834@item -q
835@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 836Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
837Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
838order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
839in larger executables.
840
dbab7a7b
NC
841This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
842
4f471f39
RS
843@kindex --force-dynamic
844@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
845@item --force-dynamic
846Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
847to VxWorks targets.
848
252b5132
RH
849@cindex partial link
850@cindex relocatable output
851@kindex -r
1049f94e 852@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 853@item -r
1049f94e 854@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 855Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 856turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
857linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
858magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
859@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 860@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
861If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
862linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
863constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
864
62bf86b4
HPN
865When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
866partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
867relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
868example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
869with input files in other formats at all.
870
252b5132
RH
871This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
872
873@kindex -R @var{file}
874@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
875@cindex symbol-only input
876@item -R @var{filename}
877@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
878Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
879relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
880to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
881programs. You may use this option more than once.
882
ff5dcc92 883For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 884followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 885the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
886
887@kindex -s
888@kindex --strip-all
889@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 890@item -s
252b5132
RH
891@itemx --strip-all
892Omit all symbol information from the output file.
893
894@kindex -S
895@kindex --strip-debug
896@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 897@item -S
252b5132
RH
898@itemx --strip-debug
899Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
900
901@kindex -t
902@kindex --trace
903@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 904@item -t
252b5132 905@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 906Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
907
908@kindex -T @var{script}
909@kindex --script=@var{script}
910@cindex script files
911@item -T @var{scriptfile}
912@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
913Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 914@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 915@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
916output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
917the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
918specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
919options accumulate.
252b5132 920
14be8564
L
921@kindex -dT @var{script}
922@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
923@cindex script files
924@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
925@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
926Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
927
928This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
929processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
930command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
931@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
932behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
933command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
934the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
935@samp{gcc}).
936
252b5132
RH
937@kindex -u @var{symbol}
938@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
939@cindex undefined symbol
940@item -u @var{symbol}
941@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
942Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
943symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
944modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
945different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
946option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
947
948@kindex -Ur
949@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 950@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
951For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
952@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 953turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
954@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
955It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
956with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
957be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
958@samp{-r} for the others.
959
577a0623
AM
960@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
961@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
962Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
963@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
964missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
965specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
966multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
967input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
968in a linker script.
a854a4a7 969
252b5132
RH
970@kindex -v
971@kindex -V
972@kindex --version
973@cindex version
974@item -v
975@itemx --version
976@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 977Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
978lists the supported emulations.
979
980@kindex -x
981@kindex --discard-all
982@cindex deleting local symbols
983@item -x
984@itemx --discard-all
985Delete all local symbols.
986
987@kindex -X
988@kindex --discard-locals
989@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 990@item -X
252b5132 991@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
992Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
993system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
994or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
995
996@kindex -y @var{symbol}
997@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998@cindex symbol tracing
999@item -y @var{symbol}
1000@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1001Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1002option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1003to prepend an underscore.
1004
1005This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1006don't know where the reference is coming from.
1007
1008@kindex -Y @var{path}
1009@item -Y @var{path}
1010Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1011for Solaris compatibility.
1012
1013@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1014@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1015The recognized keywords are:
1016@table @samp
1017
1018@item combreloc
1019Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1020lookup caching possible.
1021
1022@item defs
560e09e9 1023Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1024shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1025
6aa29e7b
JJ
1026@item execstack
1027Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1028
b039ef04
L
1029@item global
1030This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1031the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1032of subsequently loaded libraries.
1033
cd6d6c15
NC
1034@item initfirst
1035This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1036It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1037before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1038the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1039the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1040objects.
1041
1042@item interpose
1043Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1044but the primary executable.
1045
5fa222e4
AM
1046@item lazy
1047When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1048dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1049the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1050Lazy binding is the default.
1051
cd6d6c15
NC
1052@item loadfltr
1053Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1054runtime.
1055
1056@item muldefs
1057Allows multiple definitions.
1058
1059@item nocombreloc
1060Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1061
1062@item nocopyreloc
1063Disables production of copy relocs.
1064
1065@item nodefaultlib
1066Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1067ignore any default library search paths.
1068
1069@item nodelete
1070Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1071
1072@item nodlopen
1073Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1074
1075@item nodump
1076Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1077
6aa29e7b
JJ
1078@item noexecstack
1079Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1080
1081@item norelro
1082Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1083
cd6d6c15
NC
1084@item now
1085When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1086dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1087when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1088deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1089first called.
1090
1091@item origin
1092Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1093
6aa29e7b
JJ
1094@item relro
1095Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1096
24718e3b
L
1097@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1098Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1099
1100@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1101Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1102
04c3a755
NS
1103@item stack-size=@var{value}
1104Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1105Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1106@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1107
cd6d6c15
NC
1108@end table
1109
ece2d90e 1110Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -(
1113@cindex groups of archives
1114@item -( @var{archives} -)
1115@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1116The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1117either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1118
1119The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1120references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1121the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1122archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1123object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1124would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1125they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1126resolved.
1127
1128Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1129it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1130more archives.
1131
69da35b5
NC
1132@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1133@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1134@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1135@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1136Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1137recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1138and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1139the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1140behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1141so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1142restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1143
4a43e768
AM
1144@kindex --as-needed
1145@kindex --no-as-needed
1146@item --as-needed
1147@itemx --no-as-needed
1148This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1149on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1150the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1151on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1152needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1153emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1154from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1155DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1156undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1157@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1158
e56f61be
L
1159@kindex --add-needed
1160@kindex --no-add-needed
1161@item --add-needed
1162@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1163These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1164their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1165options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1166and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1167
252b5132
RH
1168@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1169@item -assert @var{keyword}
1170This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -Bdynamic
1173@kindex -dy
1174@kindex -call_shared
1175@item -Bdynamic
1176@itemx -dy
1177@itemx -call_shared
1178Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1179for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1180default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1181for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1182multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1183@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1184
a1ab1d2a
UD
1185@kindex -Bgroup
1186@item -Bgroup
1187Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1188section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1189object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1190@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1191only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1192
252b5132
RH
1193@kindex -Bstatic
1194@kindex -dn
1195@kindex -non_shared
1196@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1197@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1198@itemx -dn
1199@itemx -non_shared
1200@itemx -static
1201Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1202platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1203variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1204may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1205library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1206option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1207option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1208shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1209references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1210libraries.
252b5132
RH
1211
1212@kindex -Bsymbolic
1213@item -Bsymbolic
1214When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1215definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1216for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1217within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1218platforms which support shared libraries.
1219
40b36307
L
1220@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1221@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1222When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1223symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1224This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1225libraries.
1226
55255dae
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1228@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1230typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1231global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1232within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1233to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1234in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1235which support shared libraries.
1236
1237The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1238scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1239
40b36307
L
1240@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1241@item --dynamic-list-data
1242Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1243
1244@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1245@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1247is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1248
0b8a70d9
L
1249@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1250@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1252
252b5132
RH
1253@kindex --check-sections
1254@kindex --no-check-sections
1255@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1256@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1257Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1258been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1259perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1260suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1261allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1262restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1263Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1264force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1265option.
252b5132 1266
ddbb8a31
NC
1267@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1269@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1271This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1272by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1273command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1274output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1275input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1276specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1277follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1278behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1279
1280This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1281libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1282mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1283their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1284required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1285the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1286dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1287symbols.
1288
252b5132
RH
1289@cindex cross reference table
1290@kindex --cref
1291@item --cref
1292Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1293generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1294Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1295
1296The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1297easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1298sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1299symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1300definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1301
4818e05f
AM
1302@cindex common allocation
1303@kindex --no-define-common
1304@item --no-define-common
1305This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1306The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1307@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1308
1309The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1310the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1311of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1312forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1313Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1314from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1315This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1316and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1317duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1318paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1319
252b5132 1320@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1321@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1322@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1323Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1324address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1325times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1326limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1327context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1328symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1329constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1330using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1331Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1332space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1333@var{expression}.
1334
1335@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1336@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1337@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1338@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1339@itemx --no-demangle
1340These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1341and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1342present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1343underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1344mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1345different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1346to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1347demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1348is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1349
1350@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1351@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1352@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1353@item -I@var{file}
1354@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1355Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1356generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1357linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1358doing.
1359
7ce691ae 1360@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1361@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1362@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1363@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1364Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1365with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1366
252b5132
RH
1367@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1368@item --force-exe-suffix
1369Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1370
1371If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1372@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1373the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1374option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1375Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1376it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1377
1378@kindex --gc-sections
1379@kindex --no-gc-sections
1380@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1381@item --gc-sections
1382@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1383Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1384targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1385performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1386@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1387
d5465ba2
AM
1388@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1389examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1390symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1391command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1392referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1393libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1394referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1395the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1396relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1397
ac69cbc6 1398This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1399@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1400specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1401a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1402
c17d87de
NC
1403@kindex --print-gc-sections
1404@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1405@cindex garbage collection
1406@item --print-gc-sections
1407@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1408List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1409printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1410collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1411default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1412be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1413line.
1414
30824704
RM
1415@kindex --print-output-format
1416@cindex output format
1417@item --print-output-format
1418Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1419other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1420in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1421
252b5132
RH
1422@cindex help
1423@cindex usage
1424@kindex --help
1425@item --help
1426Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1427
ea20a7da
CC
1428@kindex --target-help
1429@item --target-help
1430Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1431
2509a395
SL
1432@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1433@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1434Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1435@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1436
1437@cindex memory usage
1438@kindex --no-keep-memory
1439@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1440@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1441symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1442instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1443necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1444while linking a large executable.
1445
1446@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1447@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1448@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1449@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1450Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1451is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1452The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1453behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1454libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1455
aa713662
L
1456@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1457@kindex -z muldefs
1458@item --allow-multiple-definition
1459@itemx -z muldefs
1460Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1461report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1462first definition will be used.
1463
b79e8c78 1464@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1465@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1466@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1467@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1468Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1469This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1470determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1471shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1472how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1473
903249d7
NC
1474The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1475referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1476an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1477a shared library.
1478
1479The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1480libraries specified at link time are that:
1481
1482@itemize @bullet
1483@item
1484A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1485that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1486resolvable at load time.
1487@item
1488There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1489symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1490
1491The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1492select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1493architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1494appropriate memset function.
1495@end itemize
b79e8c78 1496
31941635
L
1497@kindex --no-undefined-version
1498@item --no-undefined-version
1499Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1500it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1501will be issued instead.
1502
3e3b46e5
PB
1503@kindex --default-symver
1504@item --default-symver
1505Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1506exported symbols.
1507
1508@kindex --default-imported-symver
1509@item --default-imported-symver
1510Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1511imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1512
252b5132
RH
1513@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1514@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1515Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1516files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1517been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1518This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1519errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1520have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1521inappropriate.
1522
fe7929ce
AM
1523@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1524@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1525Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1526library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1527
252b5132
RH
1528@kindex --no-whole-archive
1529@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1530Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1531archive files.
1532
1533@cindex output file after errors
1534@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1535@item --noinhibit-exec
1536Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1537Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1538errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1539when it issues any error whatsoever.
1540
0a9c1c8e
CD
1541@kindex -nostdlib
1542@item -nostdlib
1543Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1544command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1545(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1546
252b5132 1547@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1548@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1549@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1550@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1551file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1552@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1553object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1554object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1555should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1556usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1557name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1558list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1559command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1560this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1561@end ifclear
1562
36af4a4e
JJ
1563@kindex -pie
1564@kindex --pic-executable
1565@item -pie
1566@itemx --pic-executable
1567@cindex position independent executables
1568Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1569ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1570libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1571address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1572normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1573defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1574
252b5132
RH
1575@kindex -qmagic
1576@item -qmagic
1577This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1578
1579@kindex -Qy
1580@item -Qy
1581This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1582
1583@kindex --relax
1584@cindex synthesizing linker
1585@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1586@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1587@item --relax
28d5f677 1588@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1589An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1590@ifset GENERIC
1591This option is only supported on a few targets.
1592@end ifset
1593@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1594@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1595@end ifset
1596@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1597@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1598@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1599@ifset XTENSA
1600@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1601@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1602@ifset M68HC11
1603@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1604@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1605@ifset POWERPC
1606@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1607@end ifset
252b5132 1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1610global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1611addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1612synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1613instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1614
1615On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1616debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1617@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1618This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1619family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1620@end ifset
1621
1622@ifset GENERIC
1623On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1624but ignored.
1625@end ifset
1626
28d5f677
NC
1627On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1628@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1629
252b5132
RH
1630@cindex retaining specified symbols
1631@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1632@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1633@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1634@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1635Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1636discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1637symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1638@ifset GENERIC
1639(such as VxWorks)
1640@end ifset
1641where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1642run-time memory.
1643
1644@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1645or symbols needed for relocations.
1646
1647You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1648line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1649
1650@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1651@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1652@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1653@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1654Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1655linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1656arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1657them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1658also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1659objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1660@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1661ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1662@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1663
ff5dcc92 1664The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1665SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1666@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1667runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1668options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1669gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1670file systems.
252b5132 1671
ff5dcc92 1672For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1673followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1674the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1675@end ifset
1676
1677@ifset GENERIC
1678@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1679@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1680@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1681When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1682happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1683of the input files.
1684
1685When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1686non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1687shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1688explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1689specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1690@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1691either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1692appearing multiple times.
1693
28c309a2
NC
1694This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1695that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1696is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1697runtime linker would do.
1698
252b5132 1699The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1700libraries:
252b5132
RH
1701@enumerate
1702@item
ff5dcc92 1703Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1704@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1705Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1706between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1707specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1708used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1709at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1710by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1711the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1712@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1713On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1714@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1715environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1716@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1717On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1718directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1719@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1720For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1721variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1722@item
ec4eb78a
L
1723For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1724@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1725libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1726@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1727@item
252b5132
RH
1728The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1729@item
1730For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1731exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1732@end enumerate
1733
1734If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1735warning and continue with the link.
1736@end ifset
1737
1738@kindex -shared
1739@kindex -Bshareable
1740@item -shared
1741@itemx -Bshareable
1742@cindex shared libraries
1743Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1744and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1745shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1746undefined symbols in the link.
1747
252b5132 1748@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1749@item --sort-common
1750@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1751@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1752This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1753ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1754sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1755eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1756between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1757specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1758
2509a395
SL
1759@kindex --sort-section=name
1760@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1761This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1762patterns in the linker script.
1763
2509a395
SL
1764@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1765@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1766This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1767patterns in the linker script.
1768
252b5132 1769@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1770@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1771Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1772each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1773size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1774
1775@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1776@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1777Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1778output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1779This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1780certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1781cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1782that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1783support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1784input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1785more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1786many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1787
1788@kindex --stats
1789@item --stats
1790Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1791as execution time and memory usage.
1792
2509a395 1793@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1794@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1795Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1796configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1797that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1798
252b5132
RH
1799@kindex --traditional-format
1800@cindex traditional format
1801@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1802For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1803the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1804use the traditional format instead.
1805
1806@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1807For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1808symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1809full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1810@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1811trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1812combine duplicate entries.
1813
2509a395
SL
1814@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1815@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1816Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1817address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1818times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1819line.
1820@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1821for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1822@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1823should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1824sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1825
2509a395
SL
1826@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1827@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1828@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1829@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1830@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1831@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1832@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1833Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1834@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1835
2509a395
SL
1836@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1837@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1838@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1839When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1840of the first byte of the text segment.
1841
9d5777a3
RM
1842@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1843@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1844@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1845When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1846the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1847text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1848
0d705e9f
AM
1849@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1850@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1851@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1852When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1853model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1854
560e09e9
NC
1855@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1856@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1857Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1858values for @samp{method}:
1859
1860@table @samp
1861@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1862Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1863
1864@item report-all
da8bce14 1865Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1866
1867@item ignore-in-object-files
1868Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1869ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1870
1871@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1872Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1873ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1874when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1875libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1876command line.
1877@end table
1878
1879The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1880by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1881
1882Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1883unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1884can change this to a warning.
1885
1715a13c
L
1886@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1887@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1888@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1889@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1890Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1891supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1892the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1893argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1894
1895@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1896@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1897@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1898Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1899used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1900about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1901is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1902see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1903use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1904symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1905@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1906
7ce691ae 1907@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1908@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1909@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1910@item --warn-common
1911Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1912a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1913but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1914you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1915Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1916warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1917
1918There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1919
1920@table @samp
1921@item int i = 1;
1922A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1923file.
1924
1925@item extern int i;
1926An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1927There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1928variable somewhere.
1929
1930@item int i;
1931A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1932variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1933The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1934single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1935size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1936a definition of the same variable.
1937@end table
1938
1939The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1940Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1941just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1942encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1943a common symbol.
1944
1945@enumerate
1946@item
1947Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1948definition for the symbol.
1949@smallexample
1950@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1951 overridden by definition
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1953@end smallexample
1954
1955@item
1956Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1957the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1958except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1959@smallexample
1960@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1961 overriding common
1962@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1963@end smallexample
1964
1965@item
1966Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1967@smallexample
1968@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1969 of `@var{symbol}'
1970@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1971@end smallexample
1972
1973@item
1974Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1975@smallexample
1976@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1977 overridden by larger common
1978@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1979@end smallexample
1980
1981@item
1982Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1983the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1984encountered in a different order.
1985@smallexample
1986@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1987 overriding smaller common
1988@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1989@end smallexample
1990@end enumerate
1991
1992@kindex --warn-constructors
1993@item --warn-constructors
1994Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1995object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1996detect the use of global constructors.
1997
1998@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1999@item --warn-multiple-gp
2000Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2001This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2002Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2003section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2004of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2005base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2006base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2007bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2008large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2009values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2010option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2011
2012@kindex --warn-once
2013@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2014@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2015@item --warn-once
2016Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2017which refers to it.
2018
2019@kindex --warn-section-align
2020@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2021@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2022@item --warn-section-align
2023Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2024alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2025The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2026is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2027the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2028
8fdd7217
NC
2029@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2030@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2031Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2032
a0c402a5
L
2033@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2034@item --warn-alternate-em
2035Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2036
560e09e9
NC
2037@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2038@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2039If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2040@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2041This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2042
2043@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2044@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2045This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2046it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2047
252b5132
RH
2048@kindex --whole-archive
2049@cindex including an entire archive
2050@item --whole-archive
2051For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2052@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2053in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2054files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2055library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2056library. This option may be used more than once.
2057
7ec229ce 2058Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2059about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2060Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2061list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2062your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2063
2509a395
SL
2064@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2065@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2066Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2067@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2068undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2069@var{symbol}.
2070
2071This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2072wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2073wishes to call the system function, it should call
2074@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2075
2076Here is a trivial example:
2077
2078@smallexample
2079void *
cc2f008e 2080__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2081@{
cc2f008e 2082 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2083 return __real_malloc (c);
2084@}
2085@end smallexample
2086
ff5dcc92 2087If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2088all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2089instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2090call the real @code{malloc} function.
2091
2092You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2093links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2094you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2095file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2096call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2097
6aa29e7b
JJ
2098@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2099@item --eh-frame-hdr
2100Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2101@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2102
e41b3a13
JJ
2103@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2104@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2105Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2106generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2107if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2108
6c1439be
L
2109@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2110@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2111@item --enable-new-dtags
2112@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2113This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2114systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2115@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2116and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2117If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2118created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2119those options are only available for ELF systems.
2120
2d643429 2121@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2122@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2123Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2124close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2125time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2126increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2127value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2128
fdc90cb4
JJ
2129@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2130@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2131Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2132@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2133new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2134the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2135hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2136
35835446
JR
2137@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2138@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2139This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2140linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2141for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2142about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2143
4f9c04f7 2144Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21451021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2146run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2147has been used.
2148
2149The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2150enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2151
c0065db7
RM
2152@kindex --build-id
2153@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2154@item --build-id
2155@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2156Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2157The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2158file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2159@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2160parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2161@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2162@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2163an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2164characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2165omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2166
2167The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2168that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2169unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2170to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2171file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2172string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2173
2174Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2175@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2176@end table
2177
0285c67d
NC
2178@c man end
2179
36f63dca 2180@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2181
0285c67d
NC
2182@c man begin OPTIONS
2183
ff5dcc92 2184The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2185the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2186normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2187use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2188@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2189like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2190symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2191object file).
2192
2193In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2194support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2195PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2196values by either a space or an equals sign.
2197
ff5dcc92 2198@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2199
2200@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2201@item --add-stdcall-alias
2202If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2203as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2204[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2205
2206@kindex --base-file
2207@item --base-file @var{file}
2208Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2209addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2210@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2211[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2212
2213@kindex --dll
2214@item --dll
2215Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2216@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2217file.
bb10df36 2218[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2219
88183869
DK
2220@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2221@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2222@item --enable-long-section-names
2223@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2224The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2225the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2226for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2227fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2228to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2229allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2230disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2231generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2232as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2233with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2234GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2235information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2236option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2237section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2238when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2239image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2240[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2241
252b5132
RH
2242@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2243@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2244@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2245@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2246If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2247do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2248only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2249resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2250undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2251@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2252to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2253warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2254import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2255to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2256feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2257@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2258mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2259[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2260
522f09cd
KT
2261@kindex --leading-underscore
2262@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2263@item --leading-underscore
2264@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2265For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2266in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2267disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2268
252b5132
RH
2269@cindex DLLs, creating
2270@kindex --export-all-symbols
2271@item --export-all-symbols
2272If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2273be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2274otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2275explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2276attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2277option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2278@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2279@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2280exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2281re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2282such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2283@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2284@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2285Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2286not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2287extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2288(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2289These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2290@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2291@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2292@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2293@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2294[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2295
2296@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2297@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2298Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2299exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2300[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2301
2927aaca
NC
2302@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2303@item --exclude-all-symbols
2304Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2305[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2306
252b5132
RH
2307@kindex --file-alignment
2308@item --file-alignment
2309Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2310file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2311512.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2313
2314@cindex heap size
2315@kindex --heap
2316@item --heap @var{reserve}
2317@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2318Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2319to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2320committed.
bb10df36 2321[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2322
2323@cindex image base
2324@kindex --image-base
2325@item --image-base @var{value}
2326Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2327the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2328is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2329your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2330other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2331for dlls.
bb10df36 2332[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2333
2334@kindex --kill-at
2335@item --kill-at
2336If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2337symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2338[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2339
26d2d8a2
BF
2340@kindex --large-address-aware
2341@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2342If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2343header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2344greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2345or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2346section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2347[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2348
252b5132
RH
2349@kindex --major-image-version
2350@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2351Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2352[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2353
2354@kindex --major-os-version
2355@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2356Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2357[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2358
2359@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2360@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2361Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2362[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2363
2364@kindex --minor-image-version
2365@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2366Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --minor-os-version
2370@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2371Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2372[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2373
2374@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2375@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2376Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@cindex DEF files, creating
2380@cindex DLLs, creating
2381@kindex --output-def
2382@item --output-def @var{file}
2383The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2384file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2385(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2386library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2387automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2388[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2389
b044cda1
CW
2390@cindex DLLs, creating
2391@kindex --out-implib
2392@item --out-implib @var{file}
2393The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2394import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2395import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2396may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2397makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2398creation step.
bb10df36 2399[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2400
2401@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2402@item --enable-auto-image-base
2403Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2404using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2405from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2406collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2407avoided.
bb10df36 2408[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2409
2410@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2411@item --disable-auto-image-base
2412Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2413user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2414default.
bb10df36 2415[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2416
2417@cindex DLLs, linking to
2418@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2419@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2420When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2421search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2422@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2423between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2424uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2425@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2426[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2427
2428@kindex --enable-auto-import
2429@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2430Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2431DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2432building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2433'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2434to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2435specification published by Microsoft.
2436
e2a83dd0
NC
2437Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2438data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2439placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2440around a problem with consts that is described here:
2441http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2442
4d8907ac
DS
2443Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2444see this message:
0d888aac 2445
ece2d90e 2446"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2447documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2448
ece2d90e
NC
2449This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2450ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2451allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2452fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2453constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2454multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2455this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2456of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2457the warning, and exit.
2458
2459There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2460data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2461
2fa9fc65
NC
2462One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2463of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2464this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2465
c0065db7
RM
2466A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2467that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2468there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2469a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2470
2471@example
2472extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2473extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2474 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2475@end example
2476
2477or
2478
2479@example
2480extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2481extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2482 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2483@end example
2484
c0065db7 2485For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2486is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2487
2488@example
2489extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2490extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2491 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2492@end example
2493
c406afaf
NC
2494or
2495
2496@example
2497extern long long extern_ll;
2498extern_ll -->
2499 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2500@end example
2501
2fa9fc65 2502A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2503'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2504@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2505requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2506building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2507merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2508between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2509constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2510
2511Original:
2512@example
2513--foo.h
2514extern int arr[];
2515--foo.c
2516#include "foo.h"
2517void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2518 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2519@}
2520@end example
2521
2522Solution 1:
2523@example
2524--foo.h
2525extern int arr[];
2526--foo.c
2527#include "foo.h"
2528void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2529 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2530 volatile int *parr = arr;
2531 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2532@}
2533@end example
2534
2535Solution 2:
2536@example
2537--foo.h
2538/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2539#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2540 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2541#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2542#else
2543#define FOO_IMPORT
2544#endif
2545extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2546--foo.c
2547#include "foo.h"
2548void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2549 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2550@}
2551@end example
2552
c0065db7 2553A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2554library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2555for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2556functions).
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2558
2559@kindex --disable-auto-import
2560@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2561Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2562@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2563[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2564
2fa9fc65
NC
2565@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2566@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2567If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2568that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2569a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2570environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2571[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2572
2573@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2574@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2575Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2576DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2578
b044cda1
CW
2579@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2580@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2581Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2583
252b5132
RH
2584@kindex --section-alignment
2585@item --section-alignment
2586Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2587addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2588[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2589
2590@cindex stack size
2591@kindex --stack
2592@item --stack @var{reserve}
2593@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2594Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2595to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2596committed.
bb10df36 2597[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2598
2599@kindex --subsystem
2600@item --subsystem @var{which}
2601@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2602@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2603Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2604legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2605@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2606the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2607@var{which}.
bb10df36 2608[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2609
2f563b51
DK
2610The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2611of the PE file header:
2612[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2613
2614@kindex --dynamicbase
2615@item --dynamicbase
2616The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2617randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2618Vista for i386 PE targets.
2619
2620@kindex --forceinteg
2621@item --forceinteg
2622Code integrity checks are enforced.
2623
2624@kindex --nxcompat
2625@item --nxcompat
2626The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2627This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2628
2629@kindex --no-isolation
2630@item --no-isolation
2631Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2632
2633@kindex --no-seh
2634@item --no-seh
2635The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2636this image.
2637
2638@kindex --no-bind
2639@item --no-bind
2640Do not bind this image.
2641
2642@kindex --wdmdriver
2643@item --wdmdriver
2644The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2645
2f563b51
DK
2646@kindex --tsaware
2647@item --tsaware
2648The image is Terminal Server aware.
2649
252b5132
RH
2650@end table
2651
0285c67d
NC
2652@c man end
2653
ac145307
BS
2654@ifset C6X
2655@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2656
2657@c man begin OPTIONS
2658
2659The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2660libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2661all executables use an index of 0.
2662
2663@table @gcctabopt
2664
2665@kindex --dsbt-size
2666@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2667This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2668or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2669entries.
2670
2671@kindex --dsbt-index
2672@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2673This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2674to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2675executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2676@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2677
fbd9ad90
PB
2678@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2679The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2680exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2681
ac145307
BS
2682@end table
2683
2684@c man end
2685@end ifset
2686
93fd0973
SC
2687@ifset M68HC11
2688@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2689
2690@c man begin OPTIONS
2691
2692The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2693memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2694
2695@table @gcctabopt
2696
2697@kindex --no-trampoline
2698@item --no-trampoline
2699This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2700is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2701instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2702
2703@kindex --bank-window
2704@item --bank-window @var{name}
2705This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2706the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2707The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2708paging and addresses within the memory window.
2709
2710@end table
2711
2712@c man end
2713@end ifset
2714
7fb9f789
NC
2715@ifset M68K
2716@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2717
2718@c man begin OPTIONS
2719
2720The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2721when linking for 68K targets.
2722
2723@table @gcctabopt
2724
2725@kindex --got
2726@item --got=@var{type}
2727This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2728@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2729@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2730Info entry for @file{ld}.
2731
2732@end table
2733
2734@c man end
2735@end ifset
2736
252b5132
RH
2737@ifset UsesEnvVars
2738@node Environment
2739@section Environment Variables
2740
0285c67d
NC
2741@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2742
560e09e9 2743You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2744@ifclear SingleFormat
2745@code{GNUTARGET},
2746@end ifclear
2747@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2748
36f63dca 2749@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2750@kindex GNUTARGET
2751@cindex default input format
2752@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2753use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2754of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2755@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2756of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2757attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2758this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2759there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2760object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2761BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2762in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2763@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2764
2765@kindex LDEMULATION
2766@cindex default emulation
2767@cindex emulation, default
2768@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2769@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2770behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2771available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2772the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2773variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2774linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2775
2776@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2777@cindex demangling, default
2778Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2779@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2780default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2781a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2782may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2783options.
2784
0285c67d
NC
2785@c man end
2786@end ifset
2787
252b5132
RH
2788@node Scripts
2789@chapter Linker Scripts
2790
2791@cindex scripts
2792@cindex linker scripts
2793@cindex command files
2794Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2795written in the linker command language.
2796
2797The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2798the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2799the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2800more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2801direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2802described below.
2803
2804The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2805yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2806linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2807to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2808such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2809
2810You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2811line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2812default linker script.
2813
2814You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2815to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2816Linker Scripts}.
2817
2818@menu
2819* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2820* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2821* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2822* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2823* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2824* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2825* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2826* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2827* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2828* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2829* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2830@end menu
2831
2832@node Basic Script Concepts
2833@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2834@cindex linker script concepts
2835We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2836describe the linker script language.
2837
2838The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2839file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2840@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2841The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2842purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2843among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2844section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2845in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2846
2847Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2848also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2849contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2850the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2851A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2852area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2853loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2854which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2855of debugging information.
2856
2857Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2858first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2859the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2860@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2861section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2862same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2863is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2864(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2865based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2866RAM address would be the VMA.
2867
2868You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2869program with the @samp{-h} option.
2870
2871Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2872@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2873has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2874information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2875will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2876static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2877referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2878
2879You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2880program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2881option.
2882
2883@node Script Format
2884@section Linker Script Format
2885@cindex linker script format
2886Linker scripts are text files.
2887
2888You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2889either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2890symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2891generally ignored.
2892
2893Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2894If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2895otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2896double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2897file name.
2898
2899You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2900@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2901to whitespace.
2902
2903@node Simple Example
2904@section Simple Linker Script Example
2905@cindex linker script example
2906@cindex example of linker script
2907Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2908
2909The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2910@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2911memory layout of the output file.
2912
2913The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2914describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2915code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2916@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2917Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2918your input files.
2919
2920For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29210x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2922linker script which will do that:
2923@smallexample
2924SECTIONS
2925@{
2926 . = 0x10000;
2927 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2928 . = 0x8000000;
2929 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2930 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2931@}
2932@end smallexample
2933
2934You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2935followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2936descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2937
252b5132
RH
2938The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2939sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2940counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2941other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2942current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2943incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2944@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2945
2946The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2947required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2948after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2949which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2950wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2951means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2952
2953Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2954@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2955@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2956
2957The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2958the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2959at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2960output section, the value of the location counter will be
2961@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2962effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2963immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2964
2965The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2966alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2967example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2968sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2969may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2970sections.
2971
2972That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2973
2974@node Simple Commands
2975@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2976@cindex linker script simple commands
2977In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2978
2979@menu
2980* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2981* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2982@ifclear SingleFormat
2983* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2984@end ifclear
2985
4a93e180 2986* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2987* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2988@end menu
2989
2990@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2991@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2992@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2993@cindex start of execution
2994@cindex first instruction
2995@cindex entry point
2996The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2997point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2998entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2999@smallexample
3000ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3001@end smallexample
3002
3003There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3004entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3005stopping when one of them succeeds:
3006@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3007@item
252b5132 3008the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3009@item
252b5132 3010the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3011@item
3ab904c4
NC
3012the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3013targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3014check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3015@item
252b5132 3016the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3017@item
252b5132
RH
3018The address @code{0}.
3019@end itemize
3020
3021@node File Commands
36f63dca 3022@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3023@cindex linker script file commands
3024Several linker script commands deal with files.
3025
3026@table @code
3027@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3028@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3029@cindex including a linker script
3030Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3031be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3032with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
303310 levels deep.
3034
4006703d
NS
3035You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3036@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3037
252b5132
RH
3038@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3039@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3040@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3041@cindex input files in linker scripts
3042@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3043@cindex linker script input object files
3044The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3045in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3046
3047For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3048a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3049then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3050
3051In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3052script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3053
e3f2db7f
AO
3054In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3055with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3056located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3057for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3058open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3059linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3060description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3061
ff5dcc92 3062If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3063name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3064@samp{-l}.
3065
3066When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3067files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3068script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3069
3070@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3071@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3072@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3073@cindex grouping input files
3074The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3075files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3076new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3077in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3078
b717d30e
JJ
3079@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3080@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3081@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3082This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3083commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3084as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3085with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3086when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3087@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3088and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3089setting afterwards.
3090
252b5132
RH
3091@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3092@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3093@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3094The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3095@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3096@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3097Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3098precedence.
3099
3100You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3101output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3102
3103@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3104@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3105@cindex library search path in linker script
3106@cindex archive search path in linker script
3107@cindex search path in linker script
3108The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3109@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3110@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3111on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3112are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3113the command line option are searched first.
3114
3115@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3116@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3117@cindex first input file
3118The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3119that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3120though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3121when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3122first file.
3123@end table
3124
3125@ifclear SingleFormat
3126@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3127@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3128A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3129
3130@table @code
3131@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3132@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3133@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3134@cindex output file format in linker script
3135The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3136output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3137exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3138(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3139line option takes precedence.
3140
3141You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3142formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3143This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3144desired endianness.
3145
3146If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3147will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3148output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3149used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3150
3151For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3152command:
3153@smallexample
3154OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3155@end smallexample
3156This says that the default format for the output file is
3157@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3158option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3159format.
3160
3161@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3162@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3163@cindex input file format in linker script
3164The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3165files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3166This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3167(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3168is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3169command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3170@end table
3171@end ifclear
3172
4a93e180
NC
3173@node REGION_ALIAS
3174@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3175@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3176@cindex region alias
3177@cindex region names
3178
3179Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3180@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3181
3182@smallexample
3183REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3184@end smallexample
3185
3186The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3187memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3188to memory regions. An example follows.
3189
3190Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3191memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3192that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3193non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3194access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3195read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3196sections:
3197
3198@itemize @bullet
3199@item
3200@code{.text} program code;
3201@item
3202@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3203@item
3204@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3205@item
3206@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3207@end itemize
3208
3209The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3210part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3211output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3212systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3213@code{C}:
3214@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3215@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3216@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3217@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3218@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3219@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3220@end multitable
3221The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3222loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3223the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3224the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3225
3226The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3227includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3228memory layout:
3229@smallexample
3230INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3231
3232SECTIONS
3233 @{
3234 .text :
3235 @{
3236 *(.text)
3237 @} > REGION_TEXT
3238 .rodata :
3239 @{
3240 *(.rodata)
3241 rodata_end = .;
3242 @} > REGION_RODATA
3243 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3244 @{
3245 data_start = .;
3246 *(.data)
3247 @} > REGION_DATA
3248 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3249 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3250 .bss :
3251 @{
3252 *(.bss)
3253 @} > REGION_BSS
3254 @}
3255@end smallexample
3256
3257Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3258regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3259variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3260@table @code
3261@item A
3262Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3263@smallexample
3264MEMORY
3265 @{
3266 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3267 @}
3268
3269REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3270REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3271REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3272REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3273@end smallexample
3274@item B
3275Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3276into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3277@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3278@smallexample
3279MEMORY
3280 @{
3281 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3282 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3283 @}
3284
3285REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3286REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3287REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3288REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3289@end smallexample
3290@item C
3291Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3292@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3293initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3294system start into the @code{RAM}.
3295@smallexample
3296MEMORY
3297 @{
3298 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3299 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3300 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3301 @}
3302
3303REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3304REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3305REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3306REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3307@end smallexample
3308@end table
3309
3310It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3311@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3312necessary:
3313@smallexample
3314#include <string.h>
3315
3316extern char data_start [];
3317extern char data_size [];
3318extern char data_load_start [];
3319
3320void copy_data(void)
3321@{
3322 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3323 @{
3324 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3325 @}
3326@}
3327@end smallexample
3328
252b5132 3329@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3330@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3331There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3332
3333@table @code
3334@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3335@kindex ASSERT
3336@cindex assertion in linker script
3337Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3338with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3339
3340@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3341@kindex EXTERN
3342@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3343Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3344symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3345modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3346each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3347command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3348
3349@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3350@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3351@cindex common allocation in linker script
3352This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3353to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3354output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3355
4818e05f
AM
3356@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3357@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3358@cindex common allocation in linker script
3359This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3360command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3361to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3362
53d25da6
AM
3363@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3364@kindex INSERT
3365@cindex insert user script into default script
3366This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3367augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3368inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3369@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3370default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3371sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3372linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3373insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3374linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3375default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3376of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3377to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3378is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3379
3380@smallexample
3381SECTIONS
3382@{
3383 OVERLAY :
3384 @{
3385 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3386 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3387 @}
3388@}
3389INSERT AFTER .text;
3390@end smallexample
3391
252b5132
RH
3392@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3393@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3394@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3395This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3396references among certain output sections.
3397
3398In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3399using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3400will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3401errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3402a function defined in the other section.
3403
3404The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3405@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3406an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3407@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3408names.
3409
3410@ifclear SingleFormat
3411@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3412@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3413@cindex machine architecture
3414@cindex architecture
3415Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3416of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3417architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3418the @samp{-f} option.
3419@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3420
3421@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3422@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3423This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3424@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3425in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3426@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3427@end table
3428
3429@node Assignments
3430@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3431@cindex assignment in scripts
3432@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3433@cindex variables, defining
3434You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3435the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3436
3437@menu
3438* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3439* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3440* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3441* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3442* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3443@end menu
3444
3445@node Simple Assignments
3446@subsection Simple Assignments
3447
3448You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3449
3450@table @code
3451@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3452@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3453@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3454@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3455@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3456@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3457@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3458@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3459@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3460@end table
3461
3462The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3463@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3464defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3465
3466The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3467may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3468
3469The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3470
3471Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3472
3473You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3474statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3475section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3476
3477The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3478expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3479
3480Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3481assignments may be used:
3482
3483@smallexample
3484floating_point = 0;
3485SECTIONS
3486@{
3487 .text :
3488 @{
3489 *(.text)
3490 _etext = .;
3491 @}
156e34dd 3492 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3493 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3494@}
3495@end smallexample
3496@noindent
3497In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3498zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3499the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3500defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3501upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3502
eb8476a6
MR
3503@node HIDDEN
3504@subsection HIDDEN
3505@cindex HIDDEN
3506For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3507exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3508
3509Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3510@code{HIDDEN}:
3511
3512@smallexample
3513HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3514SECTIONS
3515@{
3516 .text :
3517 @{
3518 *(.text)
3519 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3520 @}
3521 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3522 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3523@}
3524@end smallexample
3525@noindent
3526In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3527
252b5132
RH
3528@node PROVIDE
3529@subsection PROVIDE
3530@cindex PROVIDE
3531In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3532only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3533the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3534@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3535@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3536@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3537@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3538@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3539
3540Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3541@smallexample
3542SECTIONS
3543@{
3544 .text :
3545 @{
3546 *(.text)
3547 _etext = .;
3548 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3549 @}
3550@}
3551@end smallexample
3552
3553In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3554underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3555the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3556underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3557If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3558linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3559
7af8e998
L
3560@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3561@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3562@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3563Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3564hidden and won't be exported.
3565
73ae6183
NC
3566@node Source Code Reference
3567@subsection Source Code Reference
3568
3569Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3570intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3571a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3572symbol that does not have a value.
3573
3574Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3575transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3576stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3577prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3578mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3579of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3580variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3581linker script variable might be referred to as:
3582
3583@smallexample
3584 extern int foo;
3585@end smallexample
3586
3587But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3588
3589@smallexample
3590 _foo = 1000;
3591@end smallexample
3592
3593In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3594transformation has taken place.
3595
3596When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3597things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3598in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3599second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3600table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3601contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3602value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3603
3604@smallexample
3605 int foo = 1000;
3606@end smallexample
3607
3608creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3609holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3610number 1000 is initially stored.
3611
3612When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3613first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3614memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3615So:
3616
3617@smallexample
3618 foo = 1;
3619@end smallexample
3620
3621looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3622associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3623address. Whereas:
3624
3625@smallexample
3626 int * a = & foo;
3627@end smallexample
3628
3629looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3630and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3631the variable @samp{a}.
3632
3633Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3634the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3635an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3636
3637@smallexample
3638 foo = 1000;
3639@end smallexample
3640
3641creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3642the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3643address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3644linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3645access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3646
3647Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3648you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3649use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3650section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3651linker script contains these declarations:
3652
3653@smallexample
3654@group
3655 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3656 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3657 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3658@end group
3659@end smallexample
3660
3661Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3662
3663@smallexample
3664@group
3665 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3666
73ae6183
NC
3667 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3668@end group
3669@end smallexample
3670
3671Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3672
252b5132 3673@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3674@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3675@kindex SECTIONS
3676The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3677into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3678
3679The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3680@smallexample
3681SECTIONS
3682@{
3683 @var{sections-command}
3684 @var{sections-command}
3685 @dots{}
3686@}
3687@end smallexample
3688
3689Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3690
3691@itemize @bullet
3692@item
3693an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3694@item
3695a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3696@item
3697an output section description
3698@item
3699an overlay description
3700@end itemize
3701
3702The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3703@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3704those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3705understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3706the layout of the output file.
3707
3708Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3709below.
3710
3711If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3712linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3713section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3714input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3715example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3716in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3717
3718@menu
3719* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3720* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3721* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3722* Input Section:: Input section description
3723* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3724* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3725* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3726* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3727* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3728@end menu
3729
3730@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3731@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3732The full description of an output section looks like this:
3733@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3734@group
7e7d5768 3735@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3736 [AT(@var{lma})]
3737 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3738 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3739 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3740 @{
3741 @var{output-section-command}
3742 @var{output-section-command}
3743 @dots{}
562d3460 3744 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3745@end group
3746@end smallexample
3747
3748Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3749
3750The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3751name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3752The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3753
3754Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3755
3756@itemize @bullet
3757@item
3758a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3759@item
3760an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3761@item
3762data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3763@item
3764a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3765@end itemize
3766
3767@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3768@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3769@cindex name, section
3770@cindex section name
3771The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3772meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3773support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3774must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3775example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3776output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3777names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3778quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3779characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3780commas must be quoted.
3781
3782The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3783Discarding}.
3784
3785@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3786@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3787@cindex address, section
3788@cindex section address
3789The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3790address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3791is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3792
3793If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3794section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3795to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3796alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3797contained within the output section.
3798
3799The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3800
3801@itemize @bullet
3802@item
3803If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3804is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3805in that region.
3806
3807@item
3808If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3809regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3810section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3811be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3812
3813@item
3814If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3815the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3816counter.
3817@end itemize
3818
3819@noindent
3820For example:
3821
252b5132
RH
3822@smallexample
3823.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3824@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3825
252b5132
RH
3826@noindent
3827and
ea5cae92 3828
252b5132
RH
3829@smallexample
3830.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3831@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3832
252b5132
RH
3833@noindent
3834are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3835@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3836counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3837counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3838input sections.
252b5132
RH
3839
3840The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3841For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3842so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3843do something like this:
3844@smallexample
3845.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3846@end smallexample
3847@noindent
3848This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3849aligned upward to the specified value.
3850
3851Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3852location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3853sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3854
3855@node Input Section
36f63dca 3856@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3857@cindex input sections
3858@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3859The most common output section command is an input section description.
3860
3861The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3862You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3863in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3864map the input files into your memory layout.
3865
3866@menu
3867* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3868* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3869* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3870* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3871* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3872@end menu
3873
3874@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3875@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3876@cindex input section basics
3877An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3878by a list of section names in parentheses.
3879
3880The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3881describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3882
3883The most common input section description is to include all input
3884sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3885include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3886@smallexample
3887*(.text)
3888@end smallexample
3889@noindent
18625d54
CM
3890Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3891of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3892match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3893example:
252b5132 3894@smallexample
b4346c09 3895*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3896@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3897will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3898@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3899
3900There are two ways to include more than one section:
3901@smallexample
3902*(.text .rdata)
3903*(.text) *(.rdata)
3904@end smallexample
3905@noindent
3906The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3907@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3908first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3909they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3910@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3911@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3912
3913You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3914You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3915needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3916@smallexample
3917data.o(.data)
3918@end smallexample
3919
ae17ab41
CM
3920To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3921of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3922
3923Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3924
3925@smallexample
3926@group
3927SECTIONS @{
3928 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3929 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3930@}
3931@end group
3932@end smallexample
3933
3934In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3935input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3936@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3937@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3938whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3939
967928e9
AM
3940You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3941matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3942with no whitespace around the colon.
3943
3944@table @samp
3945@item archive:file
3946matches file within archive
3947@item archive:
3948matches the whole archive
3949@item :file
3950matches file but not one in an archive
3951@end table
3952
3953Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3954wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3955single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3956@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3957within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3958also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3959other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3960from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3961command.
3962
252b5132
RH
3963If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3964the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3965commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3966@smallexample
3967data.o
3968@end smallexample
3969
967928e9
AM
3970When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3971and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3972characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3973name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3974did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3975though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3976@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3977the archive search path.
3978
3979@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3980@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3981@cindex input section wildcards
3982@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3983@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3984@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3985In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3986name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3987
3988The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3989pattern for the file name.
3990
3991The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3992
3993@table @samp
3994@item *
3995matches any number of characters
3996@item ?
3997matches any single character
3998@item [@var{chars}]
3999matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4000character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4001@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4002@item \
4003quotes the following character
4004@end table
4005
4006When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4007will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4008Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4009exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4010@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4011a @samp{/} character.
4012
4013File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4014specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4015does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4016
4017If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4018appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4019will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4020sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4021@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4022@smallexample
4023.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4024.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4025@end smallexample
4026
bcaa7b3e 4027@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4028Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4029in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4030this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4031pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4032@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4033into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4034
bcaa7b3e
L
4035@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4036@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4037difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4038ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4039
02ecc8e9
L
4040@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4041@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4042difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4043ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4044encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4045
bcaa7b3e
L
4046@cindex SORT
4047@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4048
4049When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4050can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4051
4052@enumerate
4053@item
4054@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4055It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4056sections have the same name.
4057@item
4058@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4059It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4060sections have the same alignment.
4061@item
c0065db7 4062@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4063treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4064@item
4065@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4066is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4067@item
4068All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4069@end enumerate
4070
4071When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4072section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4073takes precedence over the command line option.
4074
4075If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4076command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4077treated as nested sorting command.
4078
4079@enumerate
4080@item
4081@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4082@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4083@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4084@item
4085@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4086@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4087@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4088@end enumerate
4089
4090If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4091command line option will be ignored.
4092
eda680f8
L
4093@cindex SORT_NONE
4094@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4095section sorting option.
4096
252b5132
RH
4097If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4098@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4099precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4100
4101This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4102files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4103sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4104The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4105with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4106linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4107@smallexample
4108@group
4109SECTIONS @{
4110 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4111 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4112 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4113 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4114@}
4115@end group
4116@end smallexample
4117
4118@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4119@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4120@cindex common symbol placement
4121@cindex uninitialized data placement
4122A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4123file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4124linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4125named @samp{COMMON}.
4126
4127You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4128other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4129particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4130input files are placed in another section.
4131
4132In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4133@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4134@smallexample
4135.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4136@end smallexample
4137
4138@cindex scommon section
4139@cindex small common symbols
4140Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4141example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4142symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4143different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4144the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4145symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4146to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4147locations.
4148
4149@cindex [COMMON]
4150You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4151notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4152@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4153
4154@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4155@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4156@cindex KEEP
4157@cindex garbage collection
4158When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4159it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4160This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4161with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4162@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4163
4164@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4165@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4166The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4167to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4168start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4169@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4170follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4171@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4172@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4173All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4174files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4175
4176@smallexample
4177@group
4178SECTIONS @{
4179 outputa 0x10000 :
4180 @{
4181 all.o
4182 foo.o (.input1)
4183 @}
36f63dca
NC
4184@end group
4185@group
252b5132
RH
4186 outputb :
4187 @{
4188 foo.o (.input2)
4189 foo1.o (.input1)
4190 @}
36f63dca
NC
4191@end group
4192@group
252b5132
RH
4193 outputc :
4194 @{
4195 *(.input1)
4196 *(.input2)
4197 @}
4198@}
4199@end group
a1ab1d2a 4200@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4201
4202@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4203@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4204@cindex data
4205@cindex section data
4206@cindex output section data
4207@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4208@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4209@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4210@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4211@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4212You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4213@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4214an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4215parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4216value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4217counter.
4218
4219The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4220store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4221bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4222stored.
4223
4224For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4225of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4226@smallexample
4227BYTE(1)
4228LONG(addr)
4229@end smallexample
4230
4231When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4232same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4233target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4234@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4235@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4236
4237If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4238which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4239When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4240true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4241endianness of the first input object file.
4242
36f63dca 4243Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4244between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4245@smallexample
4246SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4247@end smallexample
4248whereas this will work:
4249@smallexample
4250SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4251@end smallexample
4252
252b5132
RH
4253@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4254@cindex holes, filling
4255@cindex unspecified memory
4256You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4257current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4258otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4259gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4260with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4261necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4262point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4263than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4264different parts of an output section.
4265
4266This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4267value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4268@smallexample
563e308f 4269FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4270@end smallexample
4271
4272The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4273section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4274part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4275entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4276precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4277expression.
252b5132
RH
4278
4279@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4280@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4281There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4282commands.
4283
4284@table @code
4285@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4286@cindex input filename symbols
4287@cindex filename symbols
4288@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4289The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4290The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4291file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4292the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4293
4294This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4295normally used for any other object file format.
4296
4297@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4298@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4299@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4300@item CONSTRUCTORS
4301When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4302unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4303destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4304arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4305automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4306For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4307linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4308@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4309ignored for other object file formats.
4310
4311The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4312constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4313Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4314the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4315first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4316of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4317compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4318formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4319@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4320the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4321destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4322@code{exit}.
4323
4324For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4325arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4326addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4327and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4328linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4329runtime code expects to see.
4330
4331@smallexample
4332 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4333 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4334 *(.ctors)
4335 LONG(0)
4336 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4337 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4338 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4339 *(.dtors)
4340 LONG(0)
4341 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4342@end smallexample
4343
4344If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4345which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4346are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4347are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4348command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4349@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4350@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4351@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4352
4353Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4354and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4355need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4356scripts.
4357
4358@end table
4359
4360@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4361@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4362@cindex discarding sections
4363@cindex sections, discarding
4364@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4365The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4366for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4367be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4368@smallexample
49c13adb 4369.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4370@end smallexample
4371@noindent
4372will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4373@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4374sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4375space in an output section will also create the output section.
4376
a0976ea4 4377The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4378on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4379symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4380the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4381section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4382
4383@cindex /DISCARD/
4384The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4385input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4386section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4387
4388@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4389@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4390@cindex output section attributes
4391We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4392like this:
0c71d759 4393
252b5132 4394@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4395@group
7e7d5768 4396@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4397 [AT(@var{lma})]
4398 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4399 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4400 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4401 @{
4402 @var{output-section-command}
4403 @var{output-section-command}
4404 @dots{}
562d3460 4405 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4406@end group
4407@end smallexample
0c71d759 4408
252b5132
RH
4409We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4410@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4411remaining section attributes.
4412
a1ab1d2a 4413@menu
252b5132
RH
4414* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4415* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4416* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4417* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4418* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4419* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4420* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4421* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4422@end menu
4423
4424@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4425@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4426Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4427parentheses. The following types are defined:
4428
4429@table @code
4430@item NOLOAD
4431The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4432loaded into memory when the program is run.
4433@item DSECT
4434@itemx COPY
4435@itemx INFO
4436@itemx OVERLAY
4437These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4438rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4439marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4440section when the program is run.
4441@end table
4442
4443@kindex NOLOAD
4444@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4445@cindex loading, preventing
4446The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4447the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4448the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4449@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4450need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4451@smallexample
4452@group
4453SECTIONS @{
4454 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4455 @dots{}
4456@}
4457@end group
4458@end smallexample
4459
4460@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4461@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4462@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4463@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4464@cindex load address
4465@cindex section load address
4466Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4467@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4468@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4469specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4470address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4471
ea5cae92
NC
4472The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4473specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4474takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4475load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4476region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4477
4478If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4479section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4480load address:
4481
4482@itemize @bullet
4483@item
4484If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4485the LMA address as well.
4486
4487@item
4488If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4489
4490@item
4491Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4492with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4493section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4494VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4495the last section in the located region.
4496
4497@item
4498If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4499that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4500
4501@item
4502If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4503section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4504@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4505
4506@cindex ROM initialized data
4507@cindex initialized data in ROM
4508This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4509example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4510called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4511@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4512even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4513uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4514defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4515counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4516
4517@smallexample
4518@group
4519SECTIONS
4520 @{
4521 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4522 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4523 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4524 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4525 .bss 0x3000 :
4526 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4527@}
4528@end group
4529@end smallexample
4530
4531The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4532this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4533the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4534how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4535script.
4536
4537@smallexample
4538@group
4539extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4540char *src = &_etext;
4541char *dst = &_data;
4542
ea5cae92
NC
4543/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4544while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4545 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4546
ea5cae92 4547/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4548for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4549 *dst = 0;
4550@end group
4551@end smallexample
4552
bbf115d3
L
4553@node Forced Output Alignment
4554@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4555@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4556@cindex forcing output section alignment
4557@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4558You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4559
7e7d5768
AM
4560@node Forced Input Alignment
4561@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4562@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4563@cindex forcing input section alignment
4564@cindex input section alignment
4565You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4566SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4567sections, whether larger or smaller.
4568
0c71d759
NC
4569@node Output Section Constraint
4570@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4571@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4572@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4573@cindex constraints on output sections
4574You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4575of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4576read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4577@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4578
252b5132 4579@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4580@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4581@kindex >@var{region}
4582@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4583@cindex memory regions and sections
4584You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4585using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4586
4587Here is a simple example:
4588@smallexample
4589@group
4590MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4591SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4592@end group
4593@end smallexample
4594
4595@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4596@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4597@kindex :@var{phdr}
4598@cindex section, assigning to program header
4599@cindex program headers and sections
4600You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4601using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4602one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4603assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4604@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4605linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4606
4607Here is a simple example:
4608@smallexample
4609@group
4610PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4611SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4612@end group
4613@end smallexample
4614
4615@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4616@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4617@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4618@cindex section fill pattern
4619@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4620You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4621@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4622(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4623within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4624alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4625necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4626of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4627an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4628fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4629other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4630pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4631expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4632
4633You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4634output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4635
4636Here is a simple example:
4637@smallexample
4638@group
563e308f 4639SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4640@end group
4641@end smallexample
4642
4643@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4644@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4645@kindex OVERLAY
4646@cindex overlays
4647An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4648are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4649the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4650copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4651required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4652can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4653than another.
4654
4655Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4656@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4657output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4658command is as follows:
4659@smallexample
4660@group
4661OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4662 @{
4663 @var{secname1}
4664 @{
4665 @var{output-section-command}
4666 @var{output-section-command}
4667 @dots{}
4668 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4669 @var{secname2}
4670 @{
4671 @var{output-section-command}
4672 @var{output-section-command}
4673 @dots{}
4674 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4675 @dots{}
4676 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4677@end group
4678@end smallexample
4679
4680Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4681section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4682section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4683those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4684except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4685sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4686
4687The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4688addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4689memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4690whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4691and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4692and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4693
4694If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4695among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4696all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4697section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4698NOCROSSREFS}.
4699
4700For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4701provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4702defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4703@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4704the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4705within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4706symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4707
4708At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4709the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4710
4711Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4712@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4713@smallexample
4714@group
4715 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4716 @{
4717 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4718 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4719 @}
4720@end group
4721@end smallexample
4722@noindent
4723This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4724address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4725@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4726following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4727@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4728@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4729
4730C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4731like the following.
4732
4733@smallexample
4734@group
4735 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4736 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4737 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4738@end group
4739@end smallexample
4740
4741Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4742everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4743example could have been written identically as follows.
4744
4745@smallexample
4746@group
4747 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4748 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4749 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4750 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4751 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4752 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4753 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4754@end group
4755@end smallexample
4756
4757@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4758@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4759@kindex MEMORY
4760@cindex memory regions
4761@cindex regions of memory
4762@cindex allocating memory
4763@cindex discontinuous memory
4764The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4765memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4766
4767The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4768memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4769may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4770can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4771set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4772regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4773around to fit into the available regions.
4774
4775A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4776command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4777you wish. The syntax is:
4778@smallexample
4779@group
a1ab1d2a 4780MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4781 @{
4782 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4783 @dots{}
4784 @}
4785@end group
4786@end smallexample
4787
4788The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4789region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4790Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4791with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4792must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4793add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4794command.
252b5132
RH
4795
4796@cindex memory region attributes
4797The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4798whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4799not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4800@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4801section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4802the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4803them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4804
4805The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4806@table @samp
4807@item R
4808Read-only section
4809@item W
4810Read/write section
4811@item X
4812Executable section
4813@item A
4814Allocatable section
4815@item I
4816Initialized section
4817@item L
4818Same as @samp{I}
4819@item !
c09e9a8c 4820Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4821@end table
4822
4823If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4824@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4825attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4826in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4827attributes.
4828
4829@kindex ORIGIN =
4830@kindex o =
4831@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4832The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4833the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4834cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4835abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4836@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4837
4838@kindex LENGTH =
4839@kindex len =
4840@kindex l =
4841The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4842region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4843be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4844@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4845
4846In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4847available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4848and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4849linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4850is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4851or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4852explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4853region.
4854
4855@smallexample
4856@group
a1ab1d2a 4857MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4858 @{
4859 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4860 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4861 @}
4862@end group
4863@end smallexample
4864
4865Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4866specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4867@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4868a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4869output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4870was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4871the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4872output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4873region, the linker will issue an error message.
4874
3ec57632 4875It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4876expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4877@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4878
4879@smallexample
4880@group
c0065db7 4881 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4882@end group
4883@end smallexample
4884
252b5132
RH
4885@node PHDRS
4886@section PHDRS Command
4887@kindex PHDRS
4888@cindex program headers
4889@cindex ELF program headers
4890@cindex program segments
4891@cindex segments, ELF
4892The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4893@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4894loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4895program with the @samp{-p} option.
4896
4897When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4898reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4899program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4900This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4901interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4902
4903The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4904in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4905precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4906the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4907not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4908
4909The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4910generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4911ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4912
4913This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4914@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4915
4916@smallexample
4917@group
4918PHDRS
4919@{
4920 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4921 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4922@}
4923@end group
4924@end smallexample
4925
4926The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4927of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4928header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4929with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4930must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4931is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4932
4933Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4934system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4935specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4936sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4937attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4938Section Phdr}.
4939
4940It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4941merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4942repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4943contain the section.
4944
4945If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4946then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4947not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4948convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4949placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4950default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4951segment at all.
4952
4953@kindex FILEHDR
4954@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4955You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4956the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4957The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4958file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4959include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4960segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4961these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4962
4963The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4964value of the keyword.
4965
4966@table @asis
4967@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4968Indicates an unused program header.
4969
4970@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4971Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4972the file.
4973
4974@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4975Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4976
4977@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4978Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4979found.
4980
4981@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4982Indicates a segment holding note information.
4983
4984@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4985A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4986ABI.
4987
4988@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4989Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4990
4991@item @var{expression}
4992An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4993be used for types not defined above.
4994@end table
4995
4996You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4997in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4998@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4999Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5000output section attribute.
5001
5002The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5003which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5004explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5005an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5006header.
5007
5008Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5009headers used on a native ELF system.
5010
5011@example
5012@group
5013PHDRS
5014@{
5015 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5016 interp PT_INTERP ;
5017 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5018 data PT_LOAD ;
5019 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5020@}
5021
5022SECTIONS
5023@{
5024 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5025 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5026 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5027 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5028 @dots{}
5029 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5030 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5031 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5032 @dots{}
5033@}
5034@end group
5035@end example
5036
5037@node VERSION
5038@section VERSION Command
5039@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5040@cindex symbol versions
5041@cindex version script
5042@cindex versions of symbols
5043The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5044only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5045symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5046a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5047shared library.
5048
5049You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5050you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5051also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5052
5053The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5054@smallexample
5055VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5056@end smallexample
5057
5058The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5059Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5060version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5061version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5062version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5063scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5064library.
5065
5066The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5067examples.
5068
5069@smallexample
5070VERS_1.1 @{
5071 global:
5072 foo1;
5073 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5074 old*;
5075 original*;
5076 new*;
252b5132
RH
5077@};
5078
5079VERS_1.2 @{
5080 foo2;
5081@} VERS_1.1;
5082
5083VERS_2.0 @{
5084 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5085 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5086 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5087 "f(int, double)";
5088 @};
252b5132
RH
5089@} VERS_1.2;
5090@end smallexample
5091
5092This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5093version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5094The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5095a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5096of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5097symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5098is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5099in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5100However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5101name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5102
5103Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5104depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5105to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5106
5107Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5108depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5109and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5110
5111When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5112specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5113unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5114unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5115somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5116wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5117wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5118set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5119ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5120
5121The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5122they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5123could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5124However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5125
0f6bf451 5126Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5127in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5128symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5129won't.
5130
5131@smallexample
7c9c73be 5132@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5133@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5134
252b5132
RH
5135When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5136symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5137requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5138shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5139loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5140linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5141application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5142way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5143all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5144search for each symbol reference.
5145
5146The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5147doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5148that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5149functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5150the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5151required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5152that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5153versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5154the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5155
5156There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5157first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5158source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5159script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5160maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5161@smallexample
5162__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5163@end smallexample
5164@noindent
5165in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5166be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5167The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5168@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5169takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5170
5171The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5172function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5173an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5174version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5175linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5176
5177To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5178source file. Here is an example:
5179
5180@smallexample
5181__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5182__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5183__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5184__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5185@end smallexample
5186
5187In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5188unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5189example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5190@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5191
5192When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5193some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5194this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5195@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5196declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5197you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5198
5199If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5200within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5201(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5202specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5203
cb840a31
L
5204You can also specify the language in the version script:
5205
5206@smallexample
5207VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5208@end smallexample
5209
c0065db7 5210The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5211The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5212demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5213patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5214@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5215
86043bbb
MM
5216Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5217described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5218or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5219the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5220whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5221cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5222might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5223should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5224expect when you upgrade.
5225
252b5132
RH
5226@node Expressions
5227@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5228@cindex expressions
5229@cindex arithmetic
5230The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5231that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5232expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5233host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5234
5235You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5236
5237The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5238expressions.
5239
5240@menu
5241* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5242* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5243* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5244* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5245* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5246* Operators:: Operators
5247* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5248* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5249* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5250@end menu
5251
5252@node Constants
5253@subsection Constants
5254@cindex integer notation
5255@cindex constants in linker scripts
5256All constants are integers.
5257
5258As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5259octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5260hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5261@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5262@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5263value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5264
5265@cindex scaled integers
5266@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5267@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5268@cindex suffixes for integers
5269@cindex integer suffixes
5270In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5271constant by
5272@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5273@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5274@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5275@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5276@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5277@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5278@tex
5279${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5280@end tex
5281@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5282respectively. For example, the following
5283all refer to the same quantity:
5284
252b5132 5285@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5286_fourk_1 = 4K;
5287_fourk_2 = 4096;
5288_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5289_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5290@end smallexample
5291
8a308ae8
NC
5292Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5293conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5294
0c71d759
NC
5295@node Symbolic Constants
5296@subsection Symbolic Constants
5297@cindex symbolic constants
5298@kindex CONSTANT
5299It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5300the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5301
5302@table @code
5303@item MAXPAGESIZE
5304@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5305The target's maximum page size.
5306
5307@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5308@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5309The target's default page size.
5310@end table
5311
5312So for example:
5313
5314@smallexample
9d5777a3 5315 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5316@end smallexample
5317
5318will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5319supported by the target.
5320
252b5132
RH
5321@node Symbols
5322@subsection Symbol Names
5323@cindex symbol names
5324@cindex names
5325@cindex quoted symbol names
5326@kindex "
5327Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5328and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5329Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5330specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5331keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5332@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5333"SECTION" = 9;
5334"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5335@end smallexample
5336
5337Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5338to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5339whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5340
ecca9871
L
5341@node Orphan Sections
5342@subsection Orphan Sections
5343@cindex orphan
5344Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5345are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5346script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5347output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5348placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5349attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5350same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5351If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5352at the end of the file.
5353
5354For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5355well as section flag.
5356
41911f68 5357If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5358the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5359__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5360section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5361orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5362representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5363character.
5364
252b5132
RH
5365@node Location Counter
5366@subsection The Location Counter
5367@kindex .
5368@cindex dot
5369@cindex location counter
5370@cindex current output location
5371The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5372current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5373location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5374within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5375anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5376
5377@cindex holes
5378Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5379moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5380location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5381and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5382doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5383
5384@smallexample
5385SECTIONS
5386@{
5387 output :
5388 @{
5389 file1(.text)
5390 . = . + 1000;
5391 file2(.text)
5392 . += 1000;
5393 file3(.text)
563e308f 5394 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5395@}
5396@end smallexample
5397@noindent
5398In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5399located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5400followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5401@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5402@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5403specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5404
5c6bbab8
NC
5405@cindex dot inside sections
5406Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5407current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5408statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5409absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5410however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5411not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5412
5413@smallexample
5414SECTIONS
5415@{
5416 . = 0x100
5417 .text: @{
5418 *(.text)
5419 . = 0x200
5420 @}
5421 . = 0x500
5422 .data: @{
5423 *(.data)
5424 . += 0x600
5425 @}
5426@}
5427@end smallexample
5428
5429The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5430and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5431the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5432much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5433move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5434and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5435the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5436the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5437
b5666f2f
AM
5438@cindex dot outside sections
5439Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5440output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5441needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5442
5443@smallexample
5444SECTIONS
5445@{
5446 start_of_text = . ;
5447 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5448 end_of_text = . ;
5449
5450 start_of_data = . ;
5451 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5452 end_of_data = . ;
5453@}
5454@end smallexample
5455
5456If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5457not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5458between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5459should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5460blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5461the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5462sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5463statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5464special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5465place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5466as follows:
5467
5468@smallexample
5469SECTIONS
5470@{
5471 start_of_text = . ;
5472 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5473 end_of_text = . ;
5474
5475 start_of_data = . ;
5476 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5477 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5478 end_of_data = . ;
5479@}
5480@end smallexample
5481
5482This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5483@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5484placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5485assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5486a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5487section. So you could write:
5488
5489@smallexample
5490SECTIONS
5491@{
5492 start_of_text = . ;
5493 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5494 end_of_text = . ;
5495
5496 . = . ;
5497 start_of_data = . ;
5498 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5499 end_of_data = . ;
5500@}
5501@end smallexample
5502
5503Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5504@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5505
252b5132
RH
5506@need 2000
5507@node Operators
5508@subsection Operators
5509@cindex operators for arithmetic
5510@cindex arithmetic operators
5511@cindex precedence in expressions
5512The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5513the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5514@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5515@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5516@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5517@smallexample
5518precedence associativity Operators Notes
5519(highest)
55201 left ! - ~ (1)
55212 left * / %
55223 left + -
55234 left >> <<
55245 left == != > < <= >=
55256 left &
55267 left |
55278 left &&
55289 left ||
552910 right ? :
553011 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5531(lowest)
5532@end smallexample
5533Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5534(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5535(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5536@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5537@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5538@tex
5539\vskip \baselineskip
5540%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5541\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5542\hrule
5543\halign
5544{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5545height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5546&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5547height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5548\noalign{\hrule}
5549height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5550&highest&&&&&\cr
5551% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5552&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5553&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5554&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5555&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5556&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5557&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5558&7&&left&&|&\cr
5559&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5560&9&&left&&||&\cr
5561&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5562&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5563&lowest&&&&&\cr
5564height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5565\hrule}
5566@end tex
5567@iftex
5568{
5569@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5570@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5571@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5572}
5573@end iftex
5574@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5575
5576@node Evaluation
5577@subsection Evaluation
5578@cindex lazy evaluation
5579@cindex expression evaluation order
5580The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5581an expression when absolutely necessary.
5582
5583The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5584address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5585regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5586as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5587
5588However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5589until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5590other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5591for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5592
5593The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5594assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5595allocation.
5596
5597Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5598@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5599
5600If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5601available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5602following
5603@smallexample
5604@group
5605SECTIONS
5606 @{
a1ab1d2a 5607 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5608 @{ *(.text) @}
5609 @}
5610@end group
5611@end smallexample
5612@noindent
5613will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5614address}.
5615
5616@node Expression Section
5617@subsection The Section of an Expression
5618@cindex expression sections
5619@cindex absolute expressions
5620@cindex relative expressions
5621@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5622@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5623@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5624Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5625relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5626using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5627value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5628symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5629operations.
5630
abf4be64
AM
5631Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5632section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5633address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5634@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5635functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5636One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5637(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5638differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5639versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5640section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5641Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5642absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5643given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5644everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5645
5646In the following simple example,
252b5132 5647
7542af2a
AM
5648@smallexample
5649@group
5650SECTIONS
5651 @{
5652 . = 0x100;
5653 __executable_start = 0x100;
5654 .data :
5655 @{
5656 . = 0x10;
5657 __data_start = 0x10;
5658 *(.data)
5659 @}
5660 @dots{}
5661 @}
5662@end group
5663@end smallexample
252b5132 5664
7542af2a
AM
5665both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5666address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5667@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5668section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5669
5c3049d2
AM
5670For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5671addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5672
5673@itemize @bullet
5674@item
c05f749e
AM
5675Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5676operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5677absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5678@item
7542af2a
AM
5679Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5680relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5681and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5682@item
c05f749e
AM
5683Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5684in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5685address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5686before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5687@end itemize
5688
5689The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5690
5691@itemize @bullet
5692@item
5693An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5694@item
5695The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5696@item
9bc8bb33 5697The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5698relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5699(after above conversions) is also a number.
5700@item
5701The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5702relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5703section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5704@item
5705The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5706conversions) is an absolute address.
5707@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5708
5709You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5710to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5711create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5712section @samp{.data}:
5713@smallexample
5714SECTIONS
5715 @{
5716 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5717 @}
5718@end smallexample
5719@noindent
5720If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5721@samp{.data} section.
5722
7542af2a
AM
5723Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5724particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5725
252b5132
RH
5726@node Builtin Functions
5727@subsection Builtin Functions
5728@cindex functions in expressions
5729The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5730use in linker script expressions.
5731
5732@table @code
5733@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5734@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5735@cindex expression, absolute
5736Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5737of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5738value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5739normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5740
5741@item ADDR(@var{section})
5742@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5743@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5744Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5745script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5746the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5747@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5748@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5749the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5750@smallexample
5751@group
5752SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5753 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5754 @{
252b5132
RH
5755 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5756 @dots{}
5757 @}
5758 .output :
5759 @{
5760 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5761 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5762 @}
5763@dots{} @}
5764@end group
5765@end smallexample
5766
876f4090
NS
5767@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5768@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5769@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5770@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5771@cindex round up location counter
5772@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5773@cindex round up expression
5774@cindex align expression
5775Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5776to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5777doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5778arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5779expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5780equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5781
5782Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5783next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5784variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5785input sections:
252b5132
RH
5786@smallexample
5787@group
5788SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5789 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5790 *(.data)
5791 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5792 @}
5793@dots{} @}
5794@end group
5795@end smallexample
5796@noindent
5797The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5798a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5799a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5800of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5801
5802The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5803
362c1d1a
NS
5804@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5805@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5806@cindex section alignment
5807Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5808been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5809evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5810the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5811value in that section.
5812@smallexample
5813@group
5814SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5815 .output @{
5816 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5817 @dots{}
5818 @}
5819@dots{} @}
5820@end group
5821@end smallexample
5822
252b5132
RH
5823@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5824@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5825This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5826scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5827section.
5828
2d20f7bf
JJ
5829@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5830@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5831This is equivalent to either
5832@smallexample
5833(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5834@end smallexample
5835or
5836@smallexample
5837(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5838@end smallexample
5839@noindent
5840depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5841for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5842@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5843If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5844memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5845bytes in the on-disk file.
5846
5847This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5848any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5849@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5850be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5851working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5852
5853@noindent
5854Example:
5855@smallexample
5856 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5857@end smallexample
5858
5859@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5860@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5861This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5862evaluation purposes.
5863
5864@smallexample
5865 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5866@end smallexample
5867
a4f5ad88
JJ
5868@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5869@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5870This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5871@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5872When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5873does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5874@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5875boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5876it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5877@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5878
5879@smallexample
5880 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5881@end smallexample
5882
252b5132
RH
5883@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5884@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5885@cindex symbol defaults
5886Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5887defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5888return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5889default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5890shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5891the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5892existed, its value is preserved:
5893
5894@smallexample
5895@group
5896SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5897 .text : @{
5898 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5899 @dots{}
5900 @}
5901 @dots{}
5902@}
5903@end group
5904@end smallexample
5905
3ec57632
NC
5906@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5907@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5908Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5909
252b5132
RH
5910@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5911@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5912@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5913Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5914Section LMA}).
5915
5916@kindex MAX
5917@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5918Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5919
5920@kindex MIN
5921@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5922Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5923
5924@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5925@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5926@cindex unallocated address, next
5927Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5928This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5929use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5930output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5931
3ec57632
NC
5932@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5933@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5934Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5935
ba916c8a
MM
5936@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5937@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5938Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5939value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5940option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5941@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5942be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5943``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5944name.
5945
252b5132
RH
5946@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5947@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5948@cindex section size
5949Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5950been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5951evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5952@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5953@smallexample
5954@group
5955SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5956 .output @{
5957 .start = . ;
5958 @dots{}
5959 .end = . ;
5960 @}
5961 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5962 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5963@dots{} @}
5964@end group
5965@end smallexample
5966
5967@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5968@itemx sizeof_headers
5969@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5970@cindex header size
5971Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5972information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5973this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5974choose, to facilitate paging.
5975
5976@cindex not enough room for program headers
5977@cindex program headers, not enough room
5978When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5979@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5980number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5981addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5982additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5983room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5984the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5985script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5986you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5987command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5988@end table
5989
5990@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5991@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5992@cindex implicit linker scripts
5993If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5994an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5995linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5996linker will report an error.
5997
5998An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5999
6000Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6001assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6002commands.
6003
6004Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6005at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6006read. This can affect archive searching.
6007
6008@ifset GENERIC
6009@node Machine Dependent
6010@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6011
6012@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6013@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6014sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6015functionality are not listed.
6016
6017@menu
36f63dca
NC
6018@ifset H8300
6019* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6020@end ifset
6021@ifset I960
6022* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6023@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6024@ifset M68HC11
6025* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6026@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6027@ifset ARM
6028* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6029@end ifset
6030@ifset HPPA
6031* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6032@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6033@ifset M68K
6034* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6035@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6036@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6037* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6038@end ifset
2469cfa2 6039@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6040* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6041@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6042@ifset POWERPC
6043* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6044@end ifset
6045@ifset POWERPC64
6046* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6047@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6048@ifset SPU
6049* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6050@end ifset
74459f0e 6051@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6052* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6053@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6054@ifset WIN32
6055* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6056@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6057@ifset XTENSA
6058* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6059@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6060@end menu
6061@end ifset
6062
252b5132
RH
6063@ifset H8300
6064@ifclear GENERIC
6065@raisesections
6066@end ifclear
6067
6068@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6069@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6070
6071@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6072For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6073you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6074
6075@table @emph
6076@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6077@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6078@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6079targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6080program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6081respectively.
6082
6083@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6084@item synthesizing instructions
6085@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6086@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6087sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6088page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6089(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6090@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6091top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6092
6093@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6094@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6095biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6096which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6097page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6098(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6099@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6100the top page of memory).
6101
6102@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6103@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
610432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6105changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6106(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6107@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6108the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6109@end table
6110
6111@ifclear GENERIC
6112@lowersections
6113@end ifclear
6114@end ifset
6115
36f63dca 6116@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6117@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6118@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6119@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6120@node Renesas
6121@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6122
c2dcd04e
NC
6123@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6124H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6125options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6126@end ifset
6127@end ifclear
6128
6129@ifset I960
6130@ifclear GENERIC
6131@raisesections
6132@end ifclear
6133
6134@node i960
6135@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6136
6137@cindex i960 support
6138
6139You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6140specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6141family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6142incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6143linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6144libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6145search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6146
6147For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6148well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6149paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6150the names
6151
6152@smallexample
6153@group
6154try
6155libtry.a
6156tryca
6157libtryca.a
6158@end group
6159@end smallexample
6160
6161@noindent
6162The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6163two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6164
6165You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6166the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6167use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6168specifies a library.
6169
6170@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6171@cindex relaxing on i960
6172@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6173you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6174@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6175them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6176instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6177instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6178target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6179not itself call any subroutines).
6180
48229727
JB
6181@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6182@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6183@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6184The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6185
6186The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6187
85fdf906
AH
6188@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6189@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6190The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6191
36f63dca
NC
6192@ifclear GENERIC
6193@lowersections
6194@end ifclear
6195@end ifset
6196
6197@ifset ARM
6198@ifclear GENERIC
6199@raisesections
6200@end ifclear
6201
93fd0973
SC
6202@ifset M68HC11
6203@ifclear GENERIC
6204@raisesections
6205@end ifclear
6206
6207@node M68HC11/68HC12
6208@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6209
6210@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6211
6212@subsection Linker Relaxation
6213
6214For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6215optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6216
6217@table @emph
6218@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6219@item relaxing address modes
6220@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6221targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6222program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6223respectively.
6224
6225@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6226transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6227page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6228
6229@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6230When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6231of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6232addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6233@code{bset} instructions.
6234
6235@end table
6236
6237@subsection Trampoline Generation
6238
6239@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6240@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6241For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6242call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6243will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6244trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6245case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6246point to the function trampoline.
6247
6248@ifclear GENERIC
6249@lowersections
6250@end ifclear
6251@end ifset
6252
36f63dca 6253@node ARM
3674e28a 6254@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6255
6256@cindex ARM interworking support
6257@kindex --support-old-code
6258For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6259between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6260been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6261line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6262libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6263option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6264given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6265which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6266the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6267non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6268
6269@cindex thumb entry point
6270@cindex entry point, thumb
6271@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6272The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6273@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6274But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6275branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6276executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6277
ce11ba6c
KT
6278@cindex PE import table prefixing
6279@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6280The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6281the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6282element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6283import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6284
e489d0ae
PB
6285@cindex BE8
6286@kindex --be8
6287The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6288executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6289The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6290
3674e28a
PB
6291@cindex TARGET1
6292@kindex --target1-rel
6293@kindex --target1-abs
6294The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6295@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6296or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6297and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6298
6299@cindex TARGET2
6300@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6301The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6302@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6303meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6304@table @samp
6305@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6306@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6307@item abs
6308@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6309@item got-rel
6310@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6311@end table
6312
319850b4
JB
6313@cindex FIX_V4BX
6314@kindex --fix-v4bx
6315The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6316specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6317interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6318also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6319
6320In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6321linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6322@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6323
6324In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6325relocations are ignored.
6326
845b51d6
PB
6327@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6328@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6329Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6330relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6331
6332@smallexample
6333TST rM, #1
6334MOVEQ PC, rM
6335BX Rn
6336@end smallexample
6337
6338This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6339and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6340condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6341
33bfe774
JB
6342@cindex USE_BLX
6343@kindex --use-blx
6344The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6345BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6346situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6347code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6348each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6349
6350This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6351specify it if you are using that target.
6352
c6dd86c6
JB
6353@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6354@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6355The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6356bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6357instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6358to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6359the support code can read the intended values.
6360
6361The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6362intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6363and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6364intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6365full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6366you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6367
6368If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6369enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6370@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6371mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6372vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6373@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6374
6375If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6376potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6377such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6378first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6379instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6380the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6381are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6382
2de70689
MGD
6383@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6384@kindex --fix-arm1176
6385@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6386The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6387in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6388are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6389unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6390
9d5777a3 6391Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6392Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6393http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6394
bf21ed78
MS
6395@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6396@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6397The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6398warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6399enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6400linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6401using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6402not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6403
6404@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6405@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6406The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6407warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6408@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6409linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6410using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6411
726150b7
NC
6412@cindex PIC_VENEER
6413@kindex --pic-veneer
6414The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6415ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6416is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6417@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6418
6419@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6420@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6421The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6422code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6423perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6424placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6425controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6426The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6427duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6428group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6429code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6430where they should be placed.
6431
6432The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6433@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6434placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6435branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6436placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6437value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6438exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6439A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6440linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6441from the input sections.
6442
6443The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6444@samp{N = +1}.
6445
1a51c1a4
NC
6446Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6447only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6448otherwise.
6449
36f63dca
NC
6450@ifclear GENERIC
6451@lowersections
6452@end ifclear
6453@end ifset
6454
6455@ifset HPPA
6456@ifclear GENERIC
6457@raisesections
6458@end ifclear
6459
6460@node HPPA ELF32
6461@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6462@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6463@kindex --multi-subspace
6464When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6465import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6466The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6467stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6468multiple sub-spaces.
6469
6470@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6471@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6472Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6473stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6474@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6475sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6476a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6477the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6478conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6479prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6480A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6481branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6482@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6483@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6484detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6485positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6486
6487Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6488single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6489create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6490large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6491
6492@ifclear GENERIC
6493@lowersections
6494@end ifclear
6495@end ifset
6496
7fb9f789
NC
6497@ifset M68K
6498@ifclear GENERIC
6499@raisesections
6500@end ifclear
6501
6502@node M68K
6503@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6504
6505@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6506@kindex --got=@var{type}
6507The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6508The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6509@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6510the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6511@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6512entries only at non-negative offsets.
6513@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6514entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6515support such GOTs.
6516@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6517output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6518file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6519files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6520
6521@ifclear GENERIC
6522@lowersections
6523@end ifclear
6524@end ifset
6525
36f63dca
NC
6526@ifset MMIX
6527@ifclear GENERIC
6528@raisesections
6529@end ifclear
6530
6531@node MMIX
6532@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6533For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6534@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6535understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6536can translate between the two formats.
6537
6538There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6539Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6540registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6541equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6542@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6543global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6544this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6545symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6546
7a2de473
HPN
6547Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6548@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6549The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6550of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6551
6552Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6553are left out from an mmo file.
6554
6555@ifclear GENERIC
6556@lowersections
6557@end ifclear
6558@end ifset
6559
6560@ifset MSP430
6561@ifclear GENERIC
6562@raisesections
6563@end ifclear
6564
6565@node MSP430
6566@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6567For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6568will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6569just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6570
6571@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6572The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6573
6574@table @code
6575@item @samp{.vectors}
6576Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6577
6578@item @samp{.bootloader}
6579Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6580in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6581
6582@item @samp{.infomem}
6583Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6584this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6585
c0065db7 6586@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6587This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6588in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6589
6590@item @samp{.noinit}
6591Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6592
c0065db7 6593The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6594@end table
6595
6596@ifclear GENERIC
6597@lowersections
6598@end ifclear
6599@end ifset
6600
2a60a7a8
AM
6601@ifset POWERPC
6602@ifclear GENERIC
6603@raisesections
6604@end ifclear
6605
6606@node PowerPC ELF32
6607@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6608@cindex PowerPC long branches
6609@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6610Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6611displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6612@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6613@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6614the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6615section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6616section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6617@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6618both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6619considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6620
6621@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6622@table @option
6623@cindex PowerPC PLT
6624@kindex --bss-plt
6625@item --bss-plt
6626Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6627generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6628the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6629writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6630@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6631PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6632compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6633BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6634
016687f8
AM
6635@kindex --secure-plt
6636@item --secure-plt
6637@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6638@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6639when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6640layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6641style BSS PLT.
6642
2a60a7a8
AM
6643@cindex PowerPC GOT
6644@kindex --sdata-got
6645@item --sdata-got
6646The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6647sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6648@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6649section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6650@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6651@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6652@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6653@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6654PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6655pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6656GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6657really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6658
6659@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6660@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6661@item --emit-stub-syms
6662This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6663symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6664
6665@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6666@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6667@item --no-tls-optimize
6668PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6669sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6670disable the optimization.
6671@end table
6672
6673@ifclear GENERIC
6674@lowersections
6675@end ifclear
6676@end ifset
6677
6678@ifset POWERPC64
6679@ifclear GENERIC
6680@raisesections
6681@end ifclear
6682
6683@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6684@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6685
6686@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6687@table @option
6688@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6689@kindex --stub-group-size
6690@item --stub-group-size
6691Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6692by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6693@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6694sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6695a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6696the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6697conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6698prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6699A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6700branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6701@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6702@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6703detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6704positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6705
6706Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6707single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6708create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6709large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6710
6711@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6712@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6713@item --emit-stub-syms
6714This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6715symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6716
6717@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6718@kindex --dotsyms
6719@kindex --no-dotsyms
6720@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6721These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6722in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6723function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6724code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6725properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6726to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6727@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6728dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6729feature.
6730
6731@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6732@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6733@item --no-tls-optimize
6734PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6735sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6736disable the optimization.
6737
6738@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6739@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6740@item --no-opd-optimize
6741PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6742corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6743the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6744Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6745
6746@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6747@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6748@item --non-overlapping-opd
6749Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6750@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6751the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6752entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6753
6754@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6755@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6756@item --no-toc-optimize
6757PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6758entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6759reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6760marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6761marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6762relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6763unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6764reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6765discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6766reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6767code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6768optimization.
6769
6770@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6771@kindex --no-multi-toc
6772@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6773If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6774@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6775where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6776entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6777total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6778grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6779TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6780calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6781help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
678264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6783Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6784
6785@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6786@kindex --no-toc-sort
6787@item --no-toc-sort
6788By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6789happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6790placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6791with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6792referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6793@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6794results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6795off this feature.
6796
6797@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6798@kindex --plt-align
6799@kindex --no-plt-align
6800@item --plt-align
6801@itemx --no-plt-align
6802Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6803aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6804boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6805are packed tightly.
6806
6807@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6808@kindex --plt-static-chain
6809@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6810@item --plt-static-chain
6811@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6812Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6813chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6814chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6815
6816@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6817@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6818@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6819@item --plt-thread-safe
6820@itemx --no-thread-safe
6821With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6822lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6823another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6824order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6825memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6826barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6827looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6828seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6829default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6830@end table
6831
6832@ifclear GENERIC
6833@lowersections
6834@end ifclear
6835@end ifset
6836
49fa1e15
AM
6837@ifset SPU
6838@ifclear GENERIC
6839@raisesections
6840@end ifclear
6841
6842@node SPU ELF
6843@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6844
6845@cindex SPU ELF options
6846@table @option
6847
6848@cindex SPU plugins
6849@kindex --plugin
6850@item --plugin
6851This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6852
6853@cindex SPU overlays
6854@kindex --no-overlays
6855@item --no-overlays
6856Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6857regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6858@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6859turns off all this special overlay handling.
6860
6861@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6862@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6863@item --emit-stub-syms
6864This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6865symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6866
6867@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6868@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6869@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6870This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6871function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6872on calls to non-overlay regions.
6873
6874@cindex SPU local store size
6875@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6876@item --local-store=lo:hi
6877@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6878the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6879range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6880
c0065db7 6881@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6882@kindex --stack-analysis
6883@item --stack-analysis
6884SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6885unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6886under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6887@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6888@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6889determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6890for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6891for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6892for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6893find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6894and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6895under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6896dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6897is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6898and calls will be given.
6899
c0065db7 6900@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6901@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6902@item --emit-stack-syms
6903This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6904in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6905These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6906functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6907functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6908such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6909The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6910@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6911@end table
6912
6913@ifclear GENERIC
6914@lowersections
6915@end ifclear
6916@end ifset
6917
36f63dca
NC
6918@ifset TICOFF
6919@ifclear GENERIC
6920@raisesections
6921@end ifclear
6922
6923@node TI COFF
6924@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6925@cindex TI COFF versions
6926@kindex --format=@var{version}
6927The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6928TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6929also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6930format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6931header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6932
6933@ifclear GENERIC
6934@lowersections
6935@end ifclear
6936@end ifset
6937
2ca22b03
NC
6938@ifset WIN32
6939@ifclear GENERIC
6940@raisesections
6941@end ifclear
6942
6943@node WIN32
6944@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6945
c0065db7 6946This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6947See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6948command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6949
6950@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6951@cindex import libraries
6952@item import libraries
69da35b5 6953The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6954libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6955regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6956archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6957support for creating such libraries provided with the
6958@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6959
c0065db7
RM
6960@item exporting DLL symbols
6961@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6962The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6963
6964@table @emph
6965@item using auto-export functionality
6966@cindex using auto-export functionality
6967By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6968which is controlled by the following command line options:
6969
0a5d968e
NC
6970@itemize
6971@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6972@item --exclude-symbols
6973@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6974@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6975@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6976@end itemize
6977
09e2aba4
DK
6978When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6979(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6980symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6981often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6982private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 6983options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
6984exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6985final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6986
6987If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6988command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6989if either of the following are true:
6990
6991@itemize
6992@item A DEF file is used.
6993@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6994@end itemize
dc8465bf 6995
c0065db7
RM
6996@item using a DEF file
6997@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6998Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6999an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7000exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7001name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7002command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7003
7004@example
7005gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7006@end example
7007
0a5d968e
NC
7008Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7009@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7010
dc8465bf
NC
7011Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7012
7013@example
4b5bd4e7 7014LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7015
7016EXPORTS
7017foo
7018bar
7019_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7020another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7021var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7022doo = foo == foo2
7023eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7024@end example
dc8465bf 7025
7fcab871 7026This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7027symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7028alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7029by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7030@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7031@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7032export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7033in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7034symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7035
6b31ad16
DS
7036The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7037name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7038the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7039
b45619c0
NC
7040When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7041library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7042@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7043executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7044
7045With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7046specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7047non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7048
7049If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7050or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7051filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7052
4b5bd4e7
DS
7053The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7054
7055@example
7056EXPORTS
7057 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7058 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7059 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7060@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7061
7062Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7063@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7064@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7065@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7066Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7067@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7068string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7069
7070The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7071
7072@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7073will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7074by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7075linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7076library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7077
7078@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7079The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7080the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7081@code{*_imp__foo}).
7082
7083@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7084well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7085read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7086variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7087the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7088extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7089application will behave unexpectedly.
7090
7091@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7092it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7093symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7094API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7095the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7096
4b5bd4e7
DS
7097See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7098other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7099
7100@cindex creating a DEF file
7101While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7102with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7103
7104@item Using decorations
7105@cindex Using decorations
7106Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7107itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7108declared as:
7109
7110@example
7111__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7112__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7113@end example
7114
7115All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7116any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7117this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7118the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7119
7120Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7121decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7122instead:
7123
7124@example
7125__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7126__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7127@end example
7128
c0065db7
RM
7129This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7130when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7131variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7132code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7133of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7134omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7135@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7136information.
c0065db7 7137@end table
dc8465bf 7138
2ca22b03
NC
7139@cindex automatic data imports
7140@item automatic data imports
7141The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7142by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7143compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7144issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7145code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7146c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7147initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7148decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7149platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7150command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7151The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7152suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7153trigger the feature's use.
7154
c0065db7 7155auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7156additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7157
c0065db7 7158"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7159documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7160
c0065db7
RM
7161The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7162occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7163One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7164below.
7165
7166@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7167For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7168object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7169offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7170field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7171in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7172without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7173The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7174references.
7175
c0065db7
RM
7176The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7177be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7178themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7179runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7180compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7181support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7182run without error on an older system.
7183
c0065db7
RM
7184@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7185enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7186
7187@cindex direct linking to a dll
7188@item direct linking to a dll
7189The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7190including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7191libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7192traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7193libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7194function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7195though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7196storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7197tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7198large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7199
c0065db7 7200Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7201@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7202of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7203perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7204select the dll instead of an import library.
7205
2ca22b03 7206
69da35b5
NC
7207For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7208to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7209
7210@example
45e948fe
NC
7211libxxx.dll.a
7212xxx.dll.a
7213libxxx.a
7214xxx.lib
69da35b5 7215cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7216libxxx.dll
7217xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7218@end example
7219
69da35b5
NC
7220before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7221
c0065db7
RM
7222(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7223where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7224@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7225file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7226@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7227
c0065db7
RM
7228Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7229@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7230was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7231various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7232could coexist on the same machine.
7233
2ca22b03
NC
7234The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7235applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7236libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7237
7238@example
7239bin/
7240 cygxxx.dll
7241lib/
7242 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7243 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7244@end example
7245
c0065db7
RM
7246Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7247done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7248
72491. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7250@example
7251gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7252@end example
2ca22b03 7253
69da35b5
NC
7254However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7255(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7256@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7257not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7258
2ca22b03
NC
72592. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7260directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7261should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7262making the app/dll.
7263
7264@example
7265ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7266@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7267
7268Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7269
7270@example
7271gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7272@end example
69da35b5
NC
7273
7274This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7275perfectly legal
7276
7277@example
7278bin/
7279 cygxxx-5.dll
7280lib/
c0065db7 7281 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7282@end example
7283
dc8465bf 7284Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7285even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7286@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7287
7288Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7289wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7290
72911. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7292work with auto-imported data.
7293
dc8465bf
NC
72942. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7295import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7296symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7297for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7298possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7299
45e948fe
NC
73003. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7301critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7302in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7303stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7304
69da35b5 7305So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7306true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7307a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7308binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7309massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7310requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7311will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7312
c0065db7 7313@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7314@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7315@item adding additional names
7316Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7317A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7318exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7319when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7320import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7321
c0065db7 7322@example
dc8465bf
NC
7323LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7324
7325EXPORTS
c0065db7 7326foo
dc8465bf 7327_foo = foo
c0065db7 7328@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7329
7330The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7331
7332Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7333source code using the "weak" attribute:
7334
c0065db7
RM
7335@example
7336void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7337void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7338@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7339
7340See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7341symbols.
7342
7343@item renaming symbols
7344Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7345kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7346@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7347DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7348created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7349
c0065db7 7350@example
dc8465bf
NC
7351LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7352
7353EXPORTS
7354_foo = foo
c0065db7 7355@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7356
7357The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7358@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7359@end table
dc8465bf 7360
0a5d968e 7361Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7362unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7363If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7364@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7365that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7366@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7367renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7368to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7369the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7370In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7371which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7372
7373@cindex weak externals
7374@item weak externals
7375The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7376weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7377defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7378are three variants of weak externals:
7379@itemize
7380@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7381called lazy externals.
7382@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7383This form is not presently implemented.
7384@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7385implemented.
7386@end itemize
7387As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7388are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7389uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7390
7391@cindex aligned common symbols
7392@item aligned common symbols
7393As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7394desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7395the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7396carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7397by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7398tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7399but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7400warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7401@end table
7402
7403@ifclear GENERIC
7404@lowersections
7405@end ifclear
7406@end ifset
7407
e0001a05
NC
7408@ifset XTENSA
7409@ifclear GENERIC
7410@raisesections
7411@end ifclear
7412
7413@node Xtensa
7414@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7415
7416@cindex Xtensa processors
7417The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7418@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7419specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7420keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7421example, with the command:
7422
7423@smallexample
7424SECTIONS
7425@{
7426 .text : @{
7427 *(.literal .text)
7428 @}
7429@}
7430@end smallexample
7431
7432@noindent
7433@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7434and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7435literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7436interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7437group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7438files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7439and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7440
43cd72b9 7441@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7442@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7443Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7444provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7445is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7446literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7447will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7448location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7449the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7450unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7451@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7452range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7453
7454For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7455to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7456instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7457instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7458instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7459@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7460hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7461By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7462switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7463density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7464instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7465performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7466linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7467a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7468
7469The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7470control the linker:
7471
7472@cindex Xtensa options
7473@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7474@item --size-opt
7475When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7476more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7477no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7478alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7479preserve the correctness of the code.
7480@end table
e0001a05
NC
7481
7482@ifclear GENERIC
7483@lowersections
7484@end ifclear
7485@end ifset
7486
252b5132
RH
7487@ifclear SingleFormat
7488@node BFD
7489@chapter BFD
7490
7491@cindex back end
7492@cindex object file management
7493@cindex object formats available
7494@kindex objdump -i
7495The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7496These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7497object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7498format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7499it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7500associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7501object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7502(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7503list all the formats available for your configuration.
7504
7505@cindex BFD requirements
7506@cindex requirements for BFD
7507As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7508several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7509BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7510formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7511been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7512BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7513may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7514
7515One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7516mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7517useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7518conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7519
7520@menu
7521* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7522@end menu
7523
7524@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7525@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7526@cindex opening object files
7527@include bfdsumm.texi
7528@end ifclear
7529
7530@node Reporting Bugs
7531@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7532@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7533@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7534
ff5dcc92 7535Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7536
7537Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7538it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7539to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7540work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7541@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7542
7543In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7544information that enables us to fix the bug.
7545
7546@menu
7547* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7548* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7549@end menu
7550
7551@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7552@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7553@cindex bug criteria
7554
7555If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7556
7557@itemize @bullet
7558@cindex fatal signal
7559@cindex linker crash
7560@cindex crash of linker
7561@item
7562If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7563@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7564
7565@cindex error on valid input
7566@item
ff5dcc92 7567If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7568
7569@cindex invalid input
7570@item
ff5dcc92 7571If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7572may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7573object files are correct.
7574
7575@item
7576If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7577improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7578@end itemize
7579
7580@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7581@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7582@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7583@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7584
7585A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7586products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7587recommend you contact that organization first.
7588
7589You can find contact information for many support companies and
7590individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7591distribution.
7592
ad22bfe8 7593@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7594Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7595@value{BUGURL}.
7596@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7597
7598The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7599@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7600fact or leave it out, state it!
7601
7602Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7603problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7604assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7605matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7606the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7607location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7608were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7609into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7610specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7611and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7612
7613Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7614the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7615on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7616
7617Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7618bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7619respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7620You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7621
7622To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7623
7624@itemize @bullet
7625@item
ff5dcc92 7626The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7627the @samp{--version} argument.
7628
7629Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7630the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7631
7632@item
ff5dcc92 7633Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7634patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7635
7636@item
7637The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7638version number.
7639
7640@item
ff5dcc92 7641What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7642``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7643
7644@item
7645The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7646observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7647list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7648sufficient.
7649
7650If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7651and then we might not encounter the bug.
7652
7653@item
7654A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7655bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7656provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7657bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7658state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7659requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7660we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7661attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7662
7663If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7664@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7665object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7666@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7667how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7668
7669@item
7670A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7671incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7672
ff5dcc92 7673Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7674will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7675not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7676a chance to make a mistake.
7677
7678Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7679say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7680copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7681C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7682and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7683fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7684you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7685any conclusion from our observations.
7686
7687@item
ff5dcc92 7688If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7689diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7690@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7691If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7692context, not by line number.
7693
7694The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7695sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7696@end itemize
7697
7698Here are some things that are not necessary:
7699
7700@itemize @bullet
7701@item
7702A description of the envelope of the bug.
7703
7704Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7705which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7706changes will not affect it.
7707
7708This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7709will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7710with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7711We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7712
7713Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7714of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7715output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7716less time, and so on.
7717
7718However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7719report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7720
7721@item
7722A patch for the bug.
7723
7724A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7725the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7726a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7727to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7728
ff5dcc92 7729Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7730construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7731through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7732able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7733fixed.
7734
7735And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7736patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7737help us to understand.
7738
7739@item
7740A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7741
7742Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7743things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7744@end itemize
7745
7746@node MRI
7747@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7748@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7749To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7750linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7751alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7752described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7753simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7754@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7755linker commands; these commands are described here.
7756
7757In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7758file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7759features to make use of them.
7760
7761You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7762@samp{-c} command-line option.
7763
7764Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7765command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7766blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7767MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7768issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7769
7770Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7771
7772You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7773lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7774The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7775
7776@table @code
7777@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7778@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7779@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7780Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7781the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7782@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7783your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7784script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7785commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7786input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7787@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7788
7789@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7790@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7791Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7792in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7793
7794@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7795
7796@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7797@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7798Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7799@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7800
7801@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7802@item BASE @var{expression}
7803Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7804absolute addresses) in the output file.
7805
7806@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7807@item CHIP @var{expression}
7808@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7809This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7810
7811@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7812@item END
7813This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7814
7815@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7816@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7817Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7818language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7819
7820@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7821@item
252b5132
RH
7822S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7823
7824@item
7825IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7826
7827@item
7828COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7829@samp{COFF}
7830@end enumerate
7831
7832@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7833@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7834Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7835@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7836
7837The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7838same line, with no change in its effect.
7839
7840@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7841@item LOAD @var{filename}
7842@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7843Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7844same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7845command line.
7846
7847@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7848@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7849@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7850MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7851option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7852
7853@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7854@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7855@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7856Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7857order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7858script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7859sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7860file, in the order specified.
7861
7862@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7863@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7864@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7865@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7866Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7867@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7868
7869@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7870@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7871@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7872@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7873You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7874specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7875If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7876@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7877@end table
7878
793c5807
NC
7879@node GNU Free Documentation License
7880@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7881@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7882
370b66a1
CD
7883@node LD Index
7884@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7885
7886@printindex cp
7887
7888@tex
7ca01ed9 7889% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
7890% meantime:
7891\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7892\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7893\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7894\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7895\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7896\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7897\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7898\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7899\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 7900% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
7901@end tex
7902
252b5132 7903@bye